CTs 2-Channel Series

CTs 600

CTs 1200

Operation Manual

CTs 2000

CTs 3000

Obtaining Other Language Versions: To obtain information in another language about the use of this product, please contact your
local Crown Distributor. If you need assistance locating your local distributor, please contact Crown at 574-294-8000.
This manual does not include all of the details of design, production, or variations of the equipment. Nor does it cover every possible
situation which may arise during installation, operation or maintenance.
The information provided in this manual was deemed accurate as of the publication date. However, updates to this information may have
occurred. To obtain the latest version of this manual, please visit the Crown website at www.crownaudio.com.
Trademark Notice: Com-Tech, Crown, Amcron and Multi-Mode are registered trademarks of Crown International. PIP and PIP2 are
trademarks of Crown International. Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Some models may be exported under the name Amcron.®

©2003 by Crown Audio, Inc. P.O. Box 1000, Elkhart, Indiana 46515-1000 U.S.A. Telephone: 574-294-8000 134433-4
7/03

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

Important Safety
Instructions
1) Read these instructions. TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE
2) Keep these instructions. TOP OR BOTTOM COVERS. NO USER SERVICE-
3) Heed all warnings. ABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
4) Follow all instructions. QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
5) Do not use this apparatus near water. À PRÉVENIR LE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE N’ENLEVEZ
6) Clean only with a dry cloth. PAS LES COUVERCLES. IL N’Y A PAS DES PAR-
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install TIES SERVICEABLE À L’INTÉRIEUR. TOUS REPA-
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruc- RATIONS DOIT ETRE FAIRE PAR PERSONNEL
tions. QUALIFIÉ SEULMENT.
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
apparatus that produce heat. IMPORTANT
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polar-
ized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug CTs Series amplifiers require Class 2 output wiring.
has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding-type plug has two blades and a
third grounding prong. The wide blade or the MAGNETIC FIELD
third prong is provided for your safety. If the
provided plug does not fit into your outlet, CAUTION! Do not locate sensitive high-gain equip-
consult an electrician for replacement of the ment such as preamplifiers or tape decks directly
obsolete outlet. above or below the unit. Because this amplifier has
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on a high power density, it has a strong magnetic field FCC COMPLIANCE NOTICE
or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience which can induce hum into unshielded devices that This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following
receptacles, and the point where they exit from are located nearby. The field is strongest just above two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
and below the unit. must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
the apparatus. operation.
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified If an equipment rack is used, we recommend locat-
by the manufacturer. ing the amplifier(s) in the bottom of the rack and the CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
12) Use only with a cart, stand, bracket, or table preamplifier or other sensitive equipment at the top. complicance could void the user’s authority to operate the euqipment.
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
when moving the cart/apparatus combination WATCH FOR THESE SYMBOLS: reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
to avoid injury from tip-over. equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms The lightning bolt triangle is used to alert the user radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
or when unused for long periods of time. to the risk of electric shock. particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or televi-
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service person- sion reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
nel. Servicing is required when the apparatus encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
has been damaged in any way, such as power- The exclamation point triangle is used to alert the
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has user to important operating or maintenance instruc- • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
been spilled or objects have fallen into the tions. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
rain or moisture, does not operate normally,
or has been dropped.
15) To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do
not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.

page 2 Operation Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

Crown International, Inc. DECLARATION of CONFORMITY

ISSUED BY: Crown International, Inc. Sue Whitfield
1718 W. Mishawaka Road 574-294-8289
Elkhart, Indiana 46517 U.S.A. [email protected]

European Representative's Name and Address:

Nick Owen
19 Clos Nant Coslech
Pontprennau
Cardiff
CF23 8ND United Kingdom

Equipment Type: Commercial Audio Power Amplifiers

Family Name: CTs
Model Names: CTs 3000, CTs 2000, CTs 1200, CTs 600

EMC Standards:
EN 55103-1:1995 Electromagnetic Compatibility - Product Family Standard for Audio, Video, Audio-Visual and Entertainment Lighting Control Apparatus for Professional Use, Part 1: Emissions
EN 55103-1:1995 Magnetic Field Emissions-Annex A @ 10 cm and 1 M
EN 61000-3-2:1995+A14:2000 Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (equipment input current ≤16A per phase)
EN 61000-3-3:1995 Limitation of Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker in Low-Voltage Supply Systems Rated Current ≤16A
EN 55022:1992 + A1: 1995 & A2:1997 Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Disturbance Characteristics of ITE: Radiated, Class B Limits; Conducted, Class B
EN 55103-2:1996 Electromagnetic Compatibility - Product Family Standard for Audio, Video, Audio-Visual and Entertainment Lighting Control Apparatus for Professional Use, Part 2: Immunity
EN 61000-4-2:1995 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity (Environment E2-Criteria B, 4k V Contact, 8k V Air Discharge)
EN 61000-4-3:1996 Radiated, Radio-Frequency, Electromagnetic Immunity (Environment E2, criteria A)
EN 61000-4-4:1995 Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity (Criteria B)
EN 61000-4-5:1995 Surge Immunity (Criteria B)
EN 61000-4-6:1996 Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio-Frequency Fields (Criteria A)
EN 61000-4-11:1994 Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions and Voltage Variation
Safety Standard:
EN 60065: 1998 Safety Requirements - Audio Video and Similar Electronic Apparatus
I certify that the product identified above conforms to the requirements of the EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC as amended by 92/31/EEC, and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EES as amended by 93/68/EEC.

Signed

Larry Coburn

Title: Senior Vice President of Manufacturing Date of Issue: March 1, 2002

Operation Manual Due to line current harmonics, we recommend that you contact your supply authority before connection. page 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

Table of Contents

Important Safety Instructions .......................................................... 2 5.1.3 Fault ..........................................................................15

Declaration of Conformity .............................................................. 3 5.1.4 High-Pass Filters ......................................................15
1 Welcome ...................................................... 5 5.1.5 Low-Pass Filters .......................................................15
1.1 Features ............................................................................. 5 5.1.6 AC Under/Over Voltage Protection ............................15
2 How to Use This Manual .................................... 6 5.1.7 Circuit Breaker ..........................................................15
3 Setup ........................................................... 7 5.1.8 DC Output Servo .......................................................15
3.1 Unpack Your Amplifier ....................................................... 7 5.1.9 Inrush Limiting ..........................................................15
3.2 Install Your Amplifier ......................................................... 7 5.1.10 Variable-speed Fans ................................................15
3.3 Ensure Proper Cooling ....................................................... 7 5.2 Advanced Features .............................................................15
3.4 Choose Input Wire and Connectors .................................... 8 5.2.1 Switching Power Supply ...........................................15
3.5 Choose Output Wire and Connectors ................................. 8 5.2.2 Input Compressor .....................................................15
3.6 Wire Your System .............................................................. 9 5.2.3 Sleep Circuit ..............................................................15
3.6.1 Dual 8/4/2 Mode ....................................................... 9 5.2.4 Input Sensitivity Switches .........................................16
3.6.2 Bridge-Mono 16/8/4 Mode ........................................ 9 5.3 Options ..............................................................................16
3.6.3 Dual 70V/100V Mode ................................................ 10 5.3.1 Nominal Attenuation Settings ....................................17
3.6.4 Bridge-Mono 140V/200V Mode ................................ 10 6 Troubleshooting ...............................................18
3.6.5 Dual Mode with “Y” Input .......................................... 11 7 Specifications .................................................20
3.7 Connect to AC Mains ......................................................... 12 8 Service .........................................................24
3.8 Startup Procedure .............................................................. 12 8.1 Worldwide Service .............................................................24
4 Operation ...................................................... 12 8.2 US and Canada Service.......................................................24
4.1 Precautions ........................................................................ 12 8.2.1 Service at a US or Canada Service Center .................24
4.2 Front Panel Controls and Indicators ................................... 13 8.2.2 Factory Service .........................................................24
4.3 Back Panel Controls and Connectors ................................. 14 8.2.3 Factory Service Shipping Instructions .......................24
5 Advanced Features and Options ...........................15 8.2.4 Crown’s Profit Protection Plan ...................................24
5.1 Protection Systems ............................................................15 9 Warranty........................................................25
5.1.1 Thermal Level Control (TLC) .....................................15 Crown Factory Service Information Form .......................................27
5.1.2 Junction Temperature Simulation (JTS) .....................15

page 4 Operation Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

* 20 Hz–20 kHz * 20 Hz–20 kHz

CTs 600 Power CTs 2000 Power

2-ohm Dual (per ch.) 150W 2-ohm Dual (per ch.) 1000W
4-ohm Dual (per ch.) 300W 4-ohm Dual (per ch.) 1000W
8-ohm Dual (per ch.) 300W 8-ohm Dual (per ch.) 1000W
16-ohm Dual (per ch.) 300W 16-ohm Dual (per ch.) 625W
70V Dual (per ch.) 300W 70V Dual (per ch.) 1000W
4-ohm Bridge 300W 100V Dual (per ch.) 1000W
8-ohm Bridge 600W 4-ohm Bridge 2000W
16-ohm Bridge 600W 8-ohm Bridge 2000W
140V Bridge 600W 16-ohm Bridge 2000W
140V Bridge 2000W
*20 Hz–20 kHz Power: refers to maximum 1 Welcome 200V Bridge 2000W
average power in watts from 20 Hz
to 20 kHz with 0.1% THD. Building on the foundation of the Com-Tech ® • Direct constant-voltage *20 Hz–20 kHz Power: refers to maximum
Series, the Crown® CTs Series offers new flexi- (70V/100V/140V/200V) or low-impedance average power in watts from 20 Hz
bility and value for installed sound. The Com- (2/4/8 ohm) operation. No switch to 20 kHz with 0.35% THD.
Tech Series was the first to offer independent required.
selection of high- and low-impedance opera-
tion for a specific channel, and CTs Series • Input sensitivity is independently select-
amplifiers continue that tradition, with power able for each channel. Choose low-imped-
levels and features carefully chosen to perfectly ance (4/8 ohm), constant-voltage (70V/
integrate into fixed install design requirements. 100V/140V/200V), or 26 dB.

Modern power amplifiers are sophisticated • TLC protection circuitry protects the * 20 Hz–20 kHz
pieces of engineering capable of producing amplifier from long-term excessive heat by CTs 3000 Power
extremely high power levels. They must be subtly and dynamically reducing the gain
* 20 Hz–20 kHz 2-ohm Dual (per ch.) 1500W
CTs 1200 Power treated with respect and correctly installed if only when necessary.
4-ohm Dual (per ch.) 1500W
they are to provide the many years of reliable • JTS circuitry (CTs 600/1200 only) quickly
2-ohm Dual (per ch.) 250W service for which they were designed. 8-ohm Dual (per ch.) 1250W
protects BJT output transistors from
4-ohm Dual (per ch.) 600W unsafe operating conditions without shut- 16-ohm Dual (per ch.) 625W
In addition, CTs Series amplifiers include a
8-ohm Dual (per ch.) 600W ting the channel down. (Not applicable to 70V Dual (per ch.) 1500W
number of features which require some expla-
16-ohm Dual (per ch.) 300W nation before they can be used to their maxi- BCA amplifiers as they are inherently pro- 100V Dual (per ch.) 1500W
70V Dual (per ch.) 600W mum advantage. tected.)
4-ohm Bridge 3000W
4-ohm Bridge 500W Please take the time to study this manual so • P I P 2 ™ (Programmable Input Processor) 8-ohm Bridge 3000W
8-ohm Bridge 1200W that you can obtain the best possible service connector accepts accessory modules that
tailor the amplifier to suit specific applica- 16-ohm Bridge 2500W
16-ohm Bridge 1200W from your amplifier.
tions. 100V Bridge 3000W
140V Bridge 1200W 1.1 Features 200V Bridge 3000W
• Removable terminal block input connec-
• Switching Power Supply for reduced tors, with “Y” Input Switch in the standard
*20 Hz–20 kHz Power: refers to maximum *20 Hz–20 kHz Power: refers to maximum
average power in watts from 20 Hz weight. PIP2-BBY module.
average power in watts from 20 Hz
to 20 kHz with 0.1% THD. • High power-density, with all two-channel to 20 kHz with 0.35% THD.
models in a 2U chassis. (Continued on next page)

Operation Manual page 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

1 Welcome

Features (continued from page 4) • Legendary Crown class I (BCA) and class
AB+B (Multi-Mode ®) output topologies
2 How to Use This
• Switchable high-pass filter for each chan- offer the best in amplifier reliability. CTs Manual
nel provides low-frequency roll off to elim- 600/1200 use Class AB+B; CTs 2000/
inate step down transformer saturation 3000 use Class I. This manual provides you with the necessary
when used in distributed systems. information to safely and correctly setup and
• Class I is the lowest distortion, lowest
operate your amplifier. It does not cover every
• Comprehensive array of indicators includ- noise, and highest performing topology
aspect of installation, setup or operation that
ing Power, Data, and Bridge; along with available among switch-mode amplifiers.
might occur under every condition. For addi-
Ready, Signal, Clip, Thermal and Fault for
• Continuously-variable fans optimize cool- tional information, please consult Crown’s
each channel, provide accurate diagnos-
ing efficiency. Amplifier Application Guide (available online at
tics.
www.crownaudio.com), Crown Tech Support,
• Three Year, No-Fault, Fully-Transferable
• Blue Power Indicator flashes if the ampli- your system installer or retailer.
Warranty completely protects your invest-
fier shuts off due to an under/over-voltage
ment and guarantees its specifications. We strongly recommend you read all instruc-
condition on the AC mains.
tions, warnings and cautions contained in this
• Crown’s Profit Protection Plan guarantees
• Advanced protection circuitry guards manual. Also, for your protection, please send
replacement of covered amps should they
against: shorted outputs, DC, mismatched in your warranty registration card today. And
fail at any time during the original three-
loads, general overheating, under-/over- save your bill of sale—it’s your official proof of
year warranty period (available in U.S.
voltage, high-frequency overloads and purchase.
only).
internal faults.

page 6 Operation Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

3 Setup

3.1 Unpack Your Amplifier 3.2 Install Your Amplifier 3.3 Ensure Proper Cooling
Please unpack and inspect your amplifier for CAUTION: Before you begin, make sure When using an equipment rack, mount units
any damage that may have occurred during your amplifier is disconnected from the directly on top of each other. Close any open
transit. If damage is found, notify the transpor- power source, with power switch in the spaces in rack with blank panels. DO NOT
tation company immediately. Only you can ini- “off” position and all level controls block front or rear air vents. The side walls of
tiate a claim for shipping damage. Crown will turned completely down (counterclock- the rack should be a minimum of two inches
be happy to help as needed. Save the shipping wise). (5.1 cm) away from the amplifier sides, and the
carton as evidence of damage for the shipper’s back of the rack should be a minimum of four
Use a standard 19-inch (48.3 cm) equipment
inspection. inches (10.2 cm) from the amplifier back panel.
rack. See Figure 3.1 for amplifier dimensions.
We also recommend that you save all packing Figure 3.2 illustrates standard amplifier airflow.
You may also stack amps without using a cabi-
materials so you will have them if you ever
net.
need to transport the unit. Never ship the
unit without the factory pack. NOTE: When transporting, amplifiers should be
supported at both front and back.
YOU WILL NEED (not supplied):
• Input wiring cables
• Output wiring cables
Rack for mounting amplifier (or a stable surface
for stacking)
WARNING: Before you start to set up
your amplifier, make sure you read and
observe the Important Safety Instruc-
tions found at the beginning of this
manual.

Figure 3.2 Airflow

FRONT

Figure 3.1 CTS 2-Channel Series Dimensions

Operation Manual page 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

3 Setup

3.4 Choose Input Wire

and Connectors
Figure 3.3 shows connector pin assignments for
balanced wiring, and Figure 3.4 shows connec- Figure 3.3
tor pin assignments for unbalanced wiring. Balanced Input
Connector Wiring
NOTE: Custom wiring should only be per-
formed by qualified personnel.

3.5 Choose Output Wire and Con-

nectors
A protective cover is installed over the barrier-
strip output. Some models have a cover with two
holes. To remove this type of cover:
Figure 3.4
1. Loosen screws inside top and bottom holes of Unbalanced Input
cover (see Figure 3.6). Connector Wiring

2. Slide cover to left or right, then pull it off away

from the amplifier.
Crown recommends using professionally con-
structed, high-quality, two- or four-conductor,
heavy gauge speaker wire and connectors. You
may use terminal forks up to 10 AWG or bare
wire for your output connectors (see Figure 3.5).
To prevent the possibility of short-circuits, wrap
or otherwise insulate exposed loudspeaker cable
connectors. For best results, Crown recom-
mends Panduit part #PV10-10LF-L or equivalent
terminal fork. Screw spacing is shown in Figure
3.5.
Using the guidelines below, select the appropri-
ate size of wire based on the distance from
amplifier to speaker (low-impedance loads only).
Distance Wire Size
up to 25 ft. (7.6m) 16 AWG
26-40 ft. (7.9-12.2m) 14 AWG
41-60 ft. (12.5-18.3m) 12 AWG
> 60 ft (18.3m) 10 AWG

CAUTION: Never use shielded cable for Figure 3.6 How to Remove the Two-Holed
output wiring. Barrier-Block Cover

Replace output cover after output wiring

is complete. Figure 3.5 Typical Output Connector Wiring

page 8 Operation Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

3 Setup

3.6 Wire Your System

3.6.1 Dual 8/4/2 Mode

Typical input and output wiring, along with Attenuator
and Mode Switch settings are shown in Figures 3.6 and
3.7. Make sure the Mode switch is set to the “Dual” posi-
tion when operating in Dual mode.
INPUTS: Connect input wiring for each channel. The Y
switch on the rear PIP panel can be used to parallel the
channel inputs when only mono input signals are neces-
sary. The amplifier’s channel outputs are still indepen-
dent.
OUTPUTS: Maintain proper polarity (+/–) on Figure 3.8 Attenuator and Mode-
output connectors. Switch Settings for Dual Mode
Connect the Channel 1 speaker’s positive (+) lead to
amplifier Channel 1 positive terminal; repeat for negative
(–). Repeat Channel-2 wiring as for Channel 1. Refer to
Section 3.5 for output connector pin assignments.
Figure 3.7 System Wiring, Dual Mode.
Always route the input and output wires in
separate bundles.
3.6.2 Bridge-Mono 16/8/4 Mode
Typical input and output wiring, along with Attenuator
and Mode Switch settings, are shown in Figures 3.8 and
3.9. Make sure the Mode switch is set to the “Mono”
position when operating in Bridge-Mono mode.
INPUTS: Connect input wiring to Channel 1 only.
OUTPUTS: Connect the speaker across the positive ter-
minals of each channel pair. Do not use the negative ter-
minals of the channel pair when the pair is being
operated in Bridge-Mono mode. Refer to Section 3.5 for
output connector pin assignments.
NOTE: Crown provides a reference of wiring pin assign-
ments for commonly used connector types in the Crown
Amplifier Application Guide available at
www.crownaudio.com.
NOTE: When operating in Bridge-Mono mode,
turn down (full CCW) the Input Attenuator for Figure 3.10 Attenuator and Mode-
Channel 2. The Channel-1 Input Atttenuator Switch Settings for Bridge-Mono Mode
works both channels.
See the next page for constant-voltage operation.

Figure 3.9 System Wiring, Bridge-Mono Mode

Operation Manual page 9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

3 Setup

3.6.3 Dual 70V/100V Mode

Typical input and output wiring, along with Atten-
uator and Mode Switch settings are shown in Fig-
ures 3.10 and 3.11. Make sure the Mode switch is
set to the “Dual” position when operating in Dual
mode.
INPUTS: Connect input wiring to both channels.
OUTPUTS: In Dual Mode, the CTs 600/1200 can
power 25/50/70V lines; the CTs 2000/3000 can
power 25/50/70/100V lines. Connect each chan-
nel of output connectors to speakers that have the
appropriate transformers.
. Figure 3.12 Attenuator and Mode-Switch
Settings for 70V/100V Operation

Figure 3.11 System Wiring and Y-Switch Setting for 70V/100V Operation
Always route the input and output wires in
separate bundles.

3.6.4 Bridge-Mono 140V/200V Mode

Typical input and output wiring, along with Atten-
uator and Mode Switch settings are shown in Fig-
ures 3.12 and 3.13. Make sure the Mode switch is
set to the “Mono” position when operating in
Bridge-Mono mode.
INPUTS: Connect input wiring to Channel 1 only.
OUTPUTS: In Bridge-Mono mode, the CTs 600/
1200 can power 140V lines; the CTs 2000/3000
can power 140V and 200V lines. Connect speak-
ers with 140V or 200V transformers across the
positive terminals of the channel pair. Do not use
the negative terminals of the channel pair when
the pair is being operated in Bridge-Mono mode.
Refer to Section 3.5 for output connector pin
Figure 3.14 Attenuator and Mode-Switch
assignments. Settings for 140V/200V Operation
NOTE: When operating in Bridge-Mono
mode, turn down (full CCW) the Input
Attenuator for Channel 2. The Channel-1
Input Attenuator works both channels.
Figure 3.13 System Wiring and Y-Switch Setting for 140V/200V Operation

page 10 Operation Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

3 Setup

3.6.5 Dual Mode with “Y” Input

See Figure 3.14. This configuration feeds a mono
signal to both Channel 1 and Channel 2. In the
example in Figure 3.14, Channel 1 is driving a low-
impedance loudspeaker and Channel 2 is driving a
loudspeaker with a 70V transformer.
INPUTS:
Connect the signal to the Channel 1 input. On the
back panel, set the “Y” Input Switch to ON.
OUTPUTS:
Connect the Channel 1 speaker’s positive (+) lead
to Channel 1 positive terminal of amp; repeat for
negative (–).
Connect the Channel 2 speaker’s positive (+) lead
to Channel 2 positive terminal of amp; repeat for
negative (–).
See Figure 3.15. Turn up both Input Attenuators and
set the Mode Switch to Dual.
NOTE: When the “Y” Input Switch is on, the Chan-
nel 2 input can be used to daisy-chain to another
amplifier. Figure 3.15 System Wiring for “Y” Input Mode

Always route the input and output wires in

separate bundles.

Figure 3.16
Attenuator and Mode-Switch
Settings for “Y” Input Mode

Operation Manual page 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

3 Setup

3.7 Connect to AC Mains 4 Operation

On the back panel, check whether your amplifier is labeled
for 120V or 220-240V AC mains. Connect your amplifier 4.1 Precautions
to the corresponding AC mains power source (power out-
Your amplifier is protected from internal and external
let) with the supplied AC power cordset. First, connect the
faults, but you should still take the following precautions
IEC end of the cordset to the IEC connector on the ampli-
for optimum performance and safety:
fier. Then, with the amplifier in the OFF position, plug the
other end of the cordset into the AC mains. 1. Before use, your amplifier first must be configured for
proper operation, including input and output wiring
WARNING: The third prong of this connector
hookup. Improper wiring can result in serious operat-
(ground) is an important safety feature. Do not
ing difficulties. For information on wiring and config-
attempt to disable this ground connection by
uration, please consult the Setup section of this
using an adapter or other methods.
manual or, for advanced setup techniques, consult
Amplifiers don’t create energy. The AC mains voltage and Crown’s Amplifier Application Guide available online
current must be sufficient to deliver the power you expect. at www.crownaudio.com.
Check the amplifier’s back-panel label which specifies the
2. Use care when making connections, selecting signal
required AC mains voltage and frequency. The AC mains
sources and controlling the output level. The load you
voltage must be no more than 15% above the required
save may be your own!
voltage, and no less than 25% below the required voltage.
The AC mains frequency must be within the required fre- 3. Do not short the ground lead of an output cable to the
quency range. If you are unsure of the output voltage of input signal ground. This may form a ground loop
your AC mains, please consult your electrician. and cause oscillations.

3.8 Startup Procedure 4. Never connect the output to a power supply,

battery or power main. Electrical shock may
Use the following procedure when first turning on your
result.
amplifier:
5. Tampering with the circuitry, or making unauthorized
1. Turn down the level of your audio source.
circuit changes may be hazardous and invalidates all
2. Turn down the level controls of the amplifier. agency listings.
3. Turn on the “Power” switch. The Power indicator 6. Do not operate the amplifier with the red Clip LEDs
should glow. Wait for the “Ready” LED to illuminate. constantly flashing.
4. Turn up the level of your audio source to an optimum 7. Do not overdrive the mixer, which will cause clipped
level. signal to be sent to the amplifier. Such signals will be
reproduced with extreme accuracy, and loudspeaker
5. Turn up the Level controls on the amplifier until the
damage may result.
desired loudness or power level is achieved. Verify
that the Signal LED is flashing. 8. Do not operate the amplifier with less than the rated
load impedance. Due to the amplifier’s output protec-
6. Turn down the level of your audio source to its normal
tion, such a configuration may result in premature
range.
clipping and speaker damage.
If you ever need to make any wiring or installation
Remember: Crown is not liable for damage that results
changes, don’t forget to turn off the amplifier and discon-
from overdriving other system components.
nect the power cord.
For help with determining your system’s optimum gain
structure (signal levels) please refer to the Crown Ampli-
fier Application Guide, available online at
www.crownaudio.com.
page 12 Operation Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

4 Operation

4.2 Front Panel Controls Signal Indicators I. Power Indicator

and Indicators Three green LEDS per channel indicate the Blue LED indicates AC power has been
amplifier’s input and output signal levels. applied and is within the safe operating
A. Fault Indicator From bottom to top the LEDs are: range of the power supply. The LED will
Red LED, one per channel, flashes when flash when the AC line voltage is approxi-
D. Signal: input signal is above –40 dBu. mately 15% above or 25% below the nom-
the amplifier output channel has stopped
operating. Usually this means that the E. –20 dB: amplifier output is within 20 dB of inal rated value.
amplifier must be serviced. clipping. J. Data Indicator
B. Thermal Indicator F. –10 dB: amplifier output is within 10 dB of Yellow LED indicates IQ Loop data activity
Red LED, one per channel, illuminates clipping. This LED is driven by the IQ-PIP2 module
when the channel has shut down, or is via the PIP2 interface. Note: Data indicator
G. Clip Indicator flashes only when the installed PIP module
very near shutting down, due to thermal Red LED, one per channel, illuminates
stress or overload. is polled for data, or is polled to see
when the channel’s output signal reaches whether it is online.
C. Ready Indicator the onset of audible clipping. The Clip
Indicator also will illuminate during Ther- K. Bridge Mode Indicator
Green LED, one per channel, illuminates mal Level Control (TLC) limiting or when Yellow LED illuminates when the rear-
when the channel is initialized and ready to the input compressor/limiter is protecting panel Mode Switch is set to the “Bridge”
produce audio output. Indicator is off when the amplifier from input overload. position
the channel is set to standby mode via the
IQ system. H. Cooling Vents L. Power Switch
Front-to-rear forced airflow. Push-on / push-off switch.

Figure 4.1 CTs 600 front panel.

Operation Manual page 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

4 Operation

4.3 Back Panel Controls Sensitivity Switches The “Y” Input Switch also can be used to
and Connectors. Behind the input panel are the Input Sensi- daisy-chain the signal to another amplifier.
CTs 2000/3000 back panel is shown. tivity Switches. One 3-position switch per See Section 3.6.5 for details.
CTs 600/1200 look slightly different near channel selects various sensitivity set-
S. Input Connectors
the Reset button. tings. See Section 5.2.4 for details and
Balanced 3-pin terminal block connectors,
diagram.
M. Power Cord Connector one per channel.
Standard 15 amp IEC inlet. A circuit Q. Mode Switch
T. Channel Level Controls
breaker located near the IEC power inlet This two-position switch is used to select
One 21-position detented rotary attenuator
protects the amplifier from excessive AC the amplifier’s mode of operation: Dual or
per channel, ranging from –100 dB to 0 dB
current draw. Bridge Mono.
gain.
N. Reset Switch Dual mode is used for 2/4/8 ohms, for 70V
U. High-Pass Filter
Resets the circuit breaker that protects the operation with the CTs 600/1200, and for
One 3-position switch per channel selects
power supply. 70/100V operation with the CTs 2000/
between OFF, 35Hz and 70Hz 3rd-order fil-
3000.
O. Ventilation Grille ters.
Air flow is front to back. Do not block the Bridge mode is used for 4/8/16 ohms, for
V. Speaker Connectors
ventilation grilles. 140V operation with the CTs 600/1200,
One four-pole touch-proof terminal strip.
and for 100/140/200V operation with the
P. PIP ™ Input Panel Accepts up to 10 AWG terminal forks.
CTs 2000/3000.
PIP2-BBY module includes two balanced Output Cover (not shown)
3-pin removable barrier connectors. The R. “Y” Input Switch
This covers the output connectors, pro-
“Y” Input Switch is described under When set to ON, this switch parallels the
tecting users from the connectors’ poten-
letter R. input signals of the two channels, for use
tially high voltage. This cover is required
when the input signal is mono. The ampli-
for Class 2 wiring installations. See Sec-
fier’s channel outputs are still independent.
tion 3.5 for details on removing covers that
have two holes.

Figure 4.2 CTs 2000 and 3000 Back Panel Controls and Connectors

page 14 Operation Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

5 Advanced Features
and Options
NOTE: For detailed information about 5.1.3 Fault 5.1.9 Inrush Limiting
these Crown amplifier features, please The amplifier will light the Fault LED if the A soft-start circuit in the power supply mini-
consult the Crown Amplifier Application amplifier output stage stops operating. If this mizes the amplifier’s current draw during
Guide, available on the Crown website happens, see Section 8 for servicing informa- power-on.
at www.crownaudio.com tion.
5.1.10 Variable-speed Fans
5.1 Protection Systems 5.1.4 High-Pass Filters Two continuously variable speed fans direct the
Your Crown amplifier provides extensive pro- Very low frequency signals contain no useful airflow through the amplifier for cooling.
tection and diagnostic capabilities, including musical energy, waste valuable amplifier power
thermal level control, fault indicators, high- and headroom, and can be damaging to your 5.2 Advanced Features
pass filtering, DC protect, AC under/over volt- speakers. Your Crown amplifier provides high-
age protection, inrush limiting, and variable- pass filters to remove these signals from each 5.2.1 Switching Power Supply
speed fans. channel’s output. Crown’s Switching Power Supply minimizes
the amplifier’s weight.
5.1.1 Thermal Level Control (TLC) On the back panel are two 3-position 3rd-order
If the amplifier becomes too hot for safe opera- high-pass filter switches (one per channel) with Typical non-switching power supplies require
tion, the light will shine brightly and TLC will selections of Off, 35Hz and 70 Hz. large, heavy transformers in order to produce
engage the input compressor. By compressing the required power at the output stage. These
the input, the amplifier will not generate as 5.1.5 Low-Pass Filters transformers must be large to operate at 50 to
much heat and will have a chance to cool down. Gaussian-approximation ultrasonic filters pre- 60 Hz (standard AC supplied by the power
The degree of compression is proportional to vent ultrasonic feedback and HF burnout in company).
the amount of overheating. This feature allows drivers. This type of filter preserves transient By contrast, switching power supplies can
the show to go on, rather than having the reponse better than a Butterworth filter. operate with a much smaller (and lighter) trans-
amplifier shut down. former because they first convert the AC up to a
5.1.6 AC Under/Over Voltage
much higher frequency, thereby reducing
5.1.2 Junction Temperature Simu- Protection
waste.
lation (JTS) (CTs 600/1200 only) If the AC line voltage drops below 25% or rises
JTS circuitry simulates the operation of the above 15% of the nominal operating voltage of The power supply is voltage-specific, allowing
amplifier’s output transistors, and compares it the amplifier, the amplifier’s power supply turns use in regions using 120V or 240V.
against the transistors known Safe Operation off and the blue Power LED flashes. The ampli-
fier will turn back on when the AC line voltage 5.2.2 Input Compressor
Area (SOA). If JTS sees that more power is
about to be asked of the output devices than returns to safe operating levels (within +15% / Prevent input/output overload.
they are capable of delivering under the present -25%).
5.2.3 Sleep Circuit
conditions, JTS immediately limits the drive
level until it falls within the SOA. Limiting is 5.1.7 Circuit Breaker Lowers standby power consumption by shut-
proportional and kept to an absolute minimum- A circuit breaker located near the IEC power ting down the high-voltage supplies during idle
only what is required to prevent the possibility inlet protects the amplifier from excessive AC periods.
of output transistor damage. current draw. NOTE: By default, the sleep circuit is not active
This level of protection enables Crown to on the CTs 600/1200, but may be activated as a
5.1.8 DC Output Servo
increase output transistor utilization while also service option.
The output servo circuit protects your drivers
greatly increasing amplifier reliability. by eliminating DC offset, even in the presence
of very large asymmetrical signals.

Operation Manual page 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

5 Advanced Features
and Options
5.2.4 Input Sensitivity Switches 5.3 Options
To access the Input Sensitivity Switches, turn off the amplifier and remove the T-170V: See Figure 5.3. This is an autoformer that
PIP2-BBY Input Panel. The switches are in the top surface of the cavity behind the allows 100V output from the CTs 600/1200, and
Input Panel. One 3-position switch per channel selects among these settings: CTs allows other amplifiers without direct constant voltage
600/1200: 1.4V (8/4 ohms), 26 dB gain, and 1.4V (70V operation). CTs 2000/ output to be easily integrated into distributed systems.
3000: 1.4V (8/4 ohms), 26 dB gain, and 1.4V (70V) / 2V (100V). The Specifications
TP-170V: See Figure 5.4. This is a rack-mountable Figure 5.3 170V
chapter lists the input sensitivity for the 26 dB gain setting.
panel with four autoformers as described above.
PIP Modules
Versatile PIP (Programmable Input Processor) mod-
ules provide flexible expansion features that can be
added to customize the amplifier. PIP modules plug
into the connector inside the back panel of the ampli-
fier. PIP modules are available with features ranging
from error-driven compressor/limiters to crossovers to
IQ control. Your amplifier is a PIP2 amplifier, which
means it can take advantage of the many advanced fea-
tures found in PIP2 modules. The CTs Series 2-chan-
nel models do not accept earlier PIP modules.
Visit the Crown website at www.crownaudio.com, or
Figure 5.1 Input Sensitivity Switches for CTs 600/1200 contact Crown Customer Service, for descriptions of
available PIP and PIP2 modules.

Figure 5.4 TP-170V (back view)

Figure 5.2 Input Sensitivity Switches for CTs 2000/3000

page 16 Operation Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

5 Advanced Features
and Options
5.3.1 Nominal Attenuation Settings
The signal level for each input can be attenuated accurately by
adjusting the 21-step Level Control (see Section 4.3). Figure 5.5
shows the attenuation in dB for each detent. The setting of the
input-sensitivity switch varies the actual attenation as shown. Detent 26 dB 4/8 ohm or 70/100V
The accuracy of the attenuation varies with the setting. Expected 0 (full CW) 0.0 0.0
tolerances are:
Potentiometer steps 0-6 dB: ± 1 dB 1 0.5 0.5
Potentiometer steps 6-12 dB: ± 1.5 dB 2 1.0 1.5
Potentiometer steps 12-24 dB: ± 3 dB
Potentiometer steps 24-54 dB: ± 6 dB 3 2.0 3.5
4 3.0 5.0
5 4.0 6.5
6 5.0 8.0
7 6.0 9.5
8 7.0 11.0
9 8.0 13.0
10 9.0 14.5
11 10.5 16.0
12 12.0 18.0
13 13.5 20.0
14 15.0 22.0
15 18.0 24.0
16 21.0 26.0
17 24.0 30.0
18 36.0 42.0
19 48.0 54.0
20 (full CCW) OFF OFF

Figure 5.5 Attenuation vs. Detent of Level Controls for CTs 2-Channel Amplifiers

Operation Manual page 17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

6 Troubleshooting

CONDITION: Power indicator is

off. CONDITION: Fault indicator is
flashing.
POSSIBLE REASON
POSSIBLE REASON:
• The amplifier has lost AC power.
• The amplifier channel has stopped operat-
• The amplifier’s Power switch is off. ing. Refer the unit to an authorized Crown
• The amplifier is not plugged into the Service Center.
power receptacle.
• The amplifier output level is so high that
the power supply circuit breaker has
tripped. Allow the unit to cool. Turn down
the Level controls. Press the Reset Switch
on the back panel. CONDITION: Distorted sound.
POSSIBLE REASON:
• Load is wired incorrectly or Stereo/Mono
mode switch is set incorrectly. Check both.
• Input is overlaoded by a signal level that is
too high. Turn down your amplifier level
CONDITION: Power indicator is
controls, or turn down the input signal, until
flashing.
the clip light goes out.
POSSIBLE REASON:
Note: If the signal sounds distorted even though
• The AC line voltage has dropped below the Clip LED is off, the input signal may be dis-
25% or has risen above 15% of the nomi- torted before it reaches the amplifier input. Check
nal line voltage of the power supply. gain staging and output levels of the mixer or
preamp.

CONDITION: Thermal indicator is

on.
POSSIBLE REASON:
• The amplifier is becoming too hot for safe
operation. Allow amplifier to cool. Check
for loads less than 2 ohms, and for
excessive input levels. Check for proper
ventilation and proper mode-switch set- “Off/Flashing/On” above means that
ting. the LED can be off, or flashing, or on.

page 18 Operation Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

6 Troubleshooting

CONDITION: Data indicator not flash-

ing, even though PIP module is
CONDITION: No sound, even though
installed and host computer IQ soft-
the amp has power. Power LED is on with-
ware is active.
out flashing and the amp is receiving an input sig-
nal. Signal indicator is flashing. POSSIBLE REASON:
POSSIBLE REASON: • Cable between computer and PIP module is
broken or not connected.
• Speakers not connected.
Note: Data indicator flashes only when the installed
• Open circuit due to speaker failure.
PIP2 module is polled for data, or is polled to see
whether it is online.

• There is a short on the amplifier output. First

disconnect your speakers from the affected
channel(s) one by one to determine if one of
the loads is shorted.

• Ready LED is off. Channel has been set to

standby mode via the IQ system.

CONDITION: No input signal. Signal

indicator is not flashing even though audio is
applied, and the channel is ready..
“Off/Flashing/On” above means that
POSSIBLE REASON: the LED can be off, or flashing, or on.
• Input signal level is very low.
• Level controls are turned down.

Operation Manual page 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

7 Specifications

Minimum Guaranteed Power CTs 600 CTs 1200 CTs 2000 CTs 3000
(20 Hz - 20 kHz) Power at 0.1% THD Power at 0.1% THD Power at 0.35% THD Power at 0.35% THD
2-ohm Dual (per ch.) 150W 250W 1000W 1500W
4-ohm Dual (per ch.) 300W 600W 1000W 1500W
8-ohm Dual (per ch.) 300W 600W 1000W 1250W
16-ohm Dual (per ch.) 300W 300W 625W 625W
70V Dual (per ch.) 300W 600W 1000W 1500W
100V Dual (per ch.) 300W* 600W* 1000W 1500W
4-ohm Bridge 300W 500W 2000W 3000W
8-ohm Bridge 600W 1200W 2000W 3000W
16-ohm Bridge 600W 1200W 2000W 2500W
100V Bridge 600W* 1200W* 2000W 3000W
140V Bridge 600W 1200W 2000W 3000W
200V Bridge 600W* 1200W* 2000W 3000W
Performance CTs 600 CTs 1200 CTs 2000 CTs 3000
Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 20 Hz - 20 kHz) ± 0.25 dB ± 0.25 dB ± 0.25 dB ± 0.25 dB
Signal to Noise Ratio (ref. rated power, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, A-weighted) < 105 dB < 105 dB < 105 dB < 105 dB
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at full rated power, from 20 Hz to 20 kHz < 0.1% < 0.1% < 0.35% < 0.35%
Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) 60 Hz and 7 kHz at 4:1, from –40 dB to < 0.1% < 0.1% < 0.35% < 0.35%
full rated power
Damping Factor:
10 Hz to 100 Hz > 3000 > 3000 > 3000 > 3000
Crosstalk (below rated power)
20 Hz to 1kHz > 80 dB > 80 dB > 80 dB > 80 dB
Common Mode Rejection (CMR) (20 Hz to 1 kHz, typical) 50 dB 50 dB 50 dB 50 dB
DC Output Offset < 2 mV < 2mV < 2 mV < 2 mV
Input Impedance nominally balanced, nominally unbalanced 10 k ohms, 5 k ohms 10 k ohms, 5 k ohms 10 k ohms, 5 k ohms 10 k ohms, 5 k ohms

* With T-170V or TP-170V.

page 20 Operation Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

7 Specifications

Performance CTs 600 CTs 1200 CTs 2000 CTs 3000

Maximum Input Level
Before input compression +20 dBu +20 dBu +20 dBu +20 dBu
Absolute maximum + 32 dBu + 32 dBu + 32 dBu + 32 dBu
Load Impedance (Note: Safe with all types of loads)
Stereo 2, 4, 8, 16 ohms and 70V 2, 4, 8, 16 ohms and 70V 2, 4, 8, 16, 70V, 2, 4, 8, 16, 70V,
and 100V and 100V

Bridge Mono 4, 8, 16 and 140V 4, 8, 16 and 140V 4, 8, 16, 140V , 200V 4, 8, 16, 140V, 200V

Voltage Gain (at maximum level setting)

8/4 Ohm Operation 35:1 (31 dB) 50:1 (34 dB) 63.9:1 (36 dB) 71.4:1 (37 dB)
26 dB 20:1 (26 dB) 20:1 (26 dB) 20:1 (26 dB) 20:1 (26 dB)
70V Operation 50:1 (34 dB) 50:1 (34 dB) 50:1 (34 dB) 50:1 (34 dB)
100V Operation 50:1 (34 dB) 50:1 (34 dB)
Input Sensitivity
2/4/8 ohms 1.4V 1.4V 1.4V 1.4V
70V 1.4V 1.4V 1.4V 1.4V
100 V 2.0V 2.0V
26 dB gain 4 ohm load: 1.74V. 4 ohm load: 2.46V. 4 ohm load: 3.17V. 4 ohm load: 3.88V.
8 ohm load: 2.46V 8 ohm load: 3.47V 8 ohm load: 4.48V 8 ohm load: 5.01V
Required AC Mains (+15%, – 25%) 120V/60 Hz, 230V/50 Hz 120V/60 Hz, 230V/50 Hz 120V/60 Hz, 230V/50 Hz 120V/60 Hz, 230V/50 Hz
Power Draw at Idle (120 VAC mains) 24W (Standby Mode) 24W (Standby Mode) 35W (Standby Mode) 35W (Standby Mode)
Overall Group Delay < 120 usec < 120 usec < 120 usec < 120 usec
Cooling Continuously variable speed Continuously variable speed Continuously variable speed Continuously variable speed
forced air, front-to-back airflow forced air, front-to-back airflow forced air, front-to-back airflow forced air, front-to-back airflow
Dimensions
Width 19 in. (48.3 cm.) 19 in. (48.3 cm.) 19 in. (48.3 cm.) 19 in. (48.3 cm.)
Height 3.5 in. (8.9 cm.) 3.5 in. (8.9 cm.) 3.5 in. (8.9 cm.) 3.5 in. (8.9 cm.)
Depth 14.25 in. (36.2 cm.) 14.25 in. (36.2 cm.) 14.25 in. (36.2 cm.) 14.25 in. (36.2 cm.)
Net Weight 22.8 lb (10.3 kg), 23.4 lb (10.6 kg), 27.0 lb (12.2 kg) 27.7 lb (12.6 kg)
Shipping Weight 27.7 lb (12.6 kg) 28.3 lb ( 12.8 kg) 32.0 lb (14.5 kg) 32.7 lb (14.8 kg)

Operation Manual page 21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

7 Specifications

Figure 7.1 CTs 600/1200 Typical Frequency Response (1 W, 8 ohms) Figure 7.2 CTs 600/1200 Typical Crosstalk vs. Frequency

Figure 7.3
CTs 600/1200
Typical Damping Factor
vs. Frequency

page 22 Operation Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

7 Specifications

Figure 7.4 CTs 2000/3000 Typical Frequency Response (1W) Figure 7.5 CTs 2000/3000 Typical Crosstalk vs. Frequency

Figure 7.6
CTs 2000/3000
Typical Damping Factor
vs. Frequency

Operation Manual page 23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

8 Service

Crown amplifiers are quality units that rarely require chase and the defective unit to the Crown ton sealing tape. Do not use light boxes or
servicing. Before returning your unit for servicing, factory. “peanuts.” Damage caused by poor packing
please contact Crown Technical Support to verify cannot be covered under warranty.
For warranty service, we will pay for ground ship-
the need for servicing.
ping both ways in the United States. Contact Crown 4. Do not ship the unit in any kind of cabinet
This unit has very sophisticated circuitry which Factory Service to obtain prepaid shipping labels (wood or metal). Ignoring this warning may
should only be serviced by a fully trained techni- prior to sending the unit. Or, if you prefer, you may result in extensive damage to the unit and the
cian. This is one reason why each unit bears the fol- prepay the cost of shipping, and Crown will reim- cabinet. Accessories are not needed—do not
lowing label: burse you. Send copies of the shipping receipts to send the product documentation, cables and
Crown to receive reimbursement. other hardware.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, do not
remove covers. No user serviceable parts Your repaired unit will be returned via UPS ground. If you have any questions, please contact Crown
inside. Refer servicing to a qualified techni- Please contact us if other arrangements are Factory Service.
cian. required.
Crown Factory Service
8.1 Worldwide Service 8.2.3 Factory Service Shipping 1718 W. Mishawaka Rd.,
Instructions: Elkhart, Indiana 46517 U.S.A.
Service may be obtained from an authorized service
center. (Contact your local Crown/Amcron repre- 1. Before sending a Crown product to the factory Telephone: 574-294-8200
sentative or our office for a list of authorized service for service, first call the Crown Service Depart- 800-342-6939 (North America,
centers.) To obtain service, simply present the bill of ment for a return authorization (RA) number. Puerto Rico, and Virgin Islands only)
sale as proof of purchase along with the defective
2. Be sure to fill out the service information form Facsimile:
unit to an authorized service center. They will handle
that follows and enclose it with your shipment, 574-294-8301 (Technical Support)
the necessary paperwork and repair.
either inside the box or in a packing slip enve- 574-294-8124 (Factory Service)
Remember to transport your unit in the original fac- lope securely attached to the outside of the
tory pack. Internet:
shipping carton. Do not send the service infor-
http://www.crownaudio.com
mation form separately. If you are sending the
8.2 US and Canada Service unit from a Shipping Center, we recommend 8.2.4 Crown’s Profit Protection Plan
Service may be obtained in one of two ways: from taping the form to the product. We also recom-
an authorized service center or from the factory. You mend recording the serial number and model In the United States, your CTs series amplifier is
may choose either. It is important that you have your before shipping for your reference. also covered by Crown’s advance-replacement
copy of the bill of sale as your proof of purchase. Profit Protection Plan, an enhancement to Crown’s
3. Keep a copy of the serial number and model. exceptional Three-Year, No-Fault, Full Warranty.
8.2.1 Service at a US or Canada Ser- Crown’s Profit Protection Plan guarantees replace-
To ensure the safe transportation of your unit to
vice Center ment of your covered amplifier should it fail at any
the factory, ship it in an original factory packing
time during the original three-year warranty period
This method usually saves the most time and effort. container. If you don’t have the original carton,
following the date of original purchase.
Simply present your bill of sale along with the you may obtain a product service foam-in-
defective unit to an authorized service center to place shipping pack from Crown Factory Ser- Simply contact your local Crown dealer or distribu-
obtain service. They will handle the necessary vice at the number listed below. For non-war- tor with model and serial number information to ini-
paperwork and repair. Remember to transport the ranty service, you may also provide your own tiate a claim. Your dealer will supply full details on
unit in the original factory pack. A list of authorized shipping pack, however we still recommend return procedures for the defective unit as well as
service centers in your area can be obtained from using a Crown Supplied Shipping Container. standard and optional delivery times and methods
the Crown website at www.crownaudio.com, or by Minimum recommended requirements for for the replacement amplifier. Before any claim will
calling Crown Factory Service. materials are as follows: 275 P.S.I. burst test be honored, Crown Factory Service will verify that
Double-Wall carton that allows for 2-inch solid there is a problem with the unit.
8.2.2 Factory Service Styrofoam on all six sides of unit or 3 inches of
plastic bubble wrap on all six sides of unit; For more information on the Profit Protection Plan,
To obtain factory service, fill out the service
securely seal the package with an adequate car- please contact Crown Factory Service or your local
information page found in the back of this man-
Crown representative.
ual and send it along with your proof of pur-

page 24 Operation Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

9 Warranty
UNITED STATES & CANADA

SUMMARY OF WARRANTY ing interest, insurance, closing costs, and other FROM ANY DEFECT IN THE NEW CROWN
finance charges less a reasonable depreciation PRODUCT. THIS INCLUDES ANY DAMAGE TO
Crown International, 1718 West Mishawaka
on the product from the date of original pur- ANOTHER PRODUCT OR PRODUCTS RESULT-
Road, Elkhart, Indiana 46517-4095 U.S.A. war-

3YE
AR
rants to you, the ORIGINAL PURCHASER and
ANY SUBSEQUENT OWNER of each NEW Crown
product, for a period of three (3) years from the
date of purchase by the original purchaser (the
chase. Warranty work can only be performed at
our authorized service centers or at the factory.
Warranty work for some products can only be
performed at our factory. We will remedy the
defect and ship the product from the service cen-
ING FROM SUCH A DEFECT. SOME STATES DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATIONS
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-
AGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLU-
SION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
“warranty period”) that the new Crown product is
ter or our factory within a reasonable time after
free of defects in materials and workmanship. We WARRANTY ALTERATIONS
receipt of the defective product at our authorized
further warrant the new Crown product regard-
service center or our factory. All expenses in No person has the authority to enlarge, amend,
less of the reason for failure, except as excluded
remedying the defect, including surface shipping or modify this Crown Warranty. This Crown
in this Warranty.
costs in the United States, will be borne by us. Warranty is not extended by the length of time
ITEMS EXCLUDED FROM THIS (You must bear the expense of shipping the which you are deprived of the use of the new
CROWN WARRANTY product between any foreign country and the port Crown product. Repairs and replacement parts
of entry in the United States including the return provided under the terms of this Crown War-
This Crown Warranty is in effect only for failure of
shipment, and all taxes, duties, and other cus- ranty shall carry only the unexpired portion of
a new Crown product which occurred within the
toms fees for such foreign shipments.) this Crown Warranty.
Warranty Period. It does not cover any product
which has been damaged because of any inten- HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY DESIGN CHANGES
tional misuse, accident, negligence, or loss which SERVICE
We reserve the right to change the design of any
is covered under any of your insurance contracts.
You must notify us of your need for warranty ser- product from time to time without notice and with
This Crown Warranty also does not extend to the
vice within the warranty period. All components no obligation to make corresponding changes in
new Crown product if the serial number has been
must be shipped in a factory pack, which, if products previously manufactured.
defaced, altered, or removed.
needed, may be obtained from us free of charge.
LEGAL REMEDIES OF PURCHASER
WHAT THE WARRANTOR WILL DO Corrective action will be taken within a reason-
able time of the date of receipt of the defective THIS CROWN WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPE-
We will remedy any defect, regardless of the rea-
product by us or our authorized service center. If CIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, YOU MAY ALSO HAVE
son for failure (except as excluded), by repair,
the repairs made by us or our authorized service OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO
replacement, or refund. We may not elect refund
center are not satisfactory, notify us or our autho- STATE. No action to enforce this Crown War-
unless you agree, or unless we are unable to pro-
rized service center immediately. ranty shall be commenced after expiration of the
vide replacement, and repair is not practical or
warranty period.
cannot be timely made. If a refund is elected, DISCLAIMER OF CONSEQUENTIAL
then you must make the defective or malfunc- AND INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THIS STATEMENT OF WARRANTY SUPERSEDES
tioning product available to us free and clear of ANY OTHERS CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL
YOU ARE NOT ENTITLED TO RECOVER FROM
all liens or other encumbrances. The refund will FOR CROWN PRODUCTS 12/01
US ANY INCIDENTAL DAMAGES RESULTING
be equal to the actual purchase price, not includ-

Operation Manual page 25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

9 Warranty
WORLDWIDE EXCEPT USA & CANADA

SUMMARY OF WARRANTY WHAT THE WARRANTOR WILL DO DISCLAIMER OF CONSEQUENTIAL

Crown International, 1718 West Mishawaka Road, AND INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
We will remedy any defect, regardless of the rea-

3
YE
AR
Elkhart, Indiana 46517-4095 U.S.A. warrants to
you, the ORIGINAL PURCHASER and ANY SUB-
SEQUENT OWNER of each NEW Crown1 product,
for a period of three (3) years from the date of pur-
chase by the original purchaser (the “warranty
son for failure (except as excluded), by repair,
replacement, or refund. We may not elect refund
unless you agree, or unless we are unable to pro-
vide replacement, and repair is not practical or
cannot be timely made. If a refund is elected, then
YOU ARE NOT ENTITLED TO RECOVER FROM US
ANY INCIDENTAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM
ANY DEFECT IN THE NEW CROWN PRODUCT.
THIS INCLUDES ANY DAMAGE TO ANOTHER
PRODUCT OR PRODUCTS RESULTING FROM
period”) that the new Crown product is free of you must make the defective or malfunctioning SUCH A DEFECT.
defects in materials and workmanship, and we product available to us free and clear of all liens
further warrant the new Crown product regardless or other encumbrances. The refund will be equal WARRANTY ALTERATIONS
of the reason for failure, except as excluded in this to the actual purchase price, not including inter- No person has the authority to enlarge, amend, or
Warranty. est, insurance, closing costs, and other finance modify this Crown Warranty. This Crown Warranty
1 Note: If your unit bears the name “Amcron,” please substitute charges less a reasonable depreciation on the is not extended by the length of time which you are
it for the name “Crown” in this warranty. product from the date of original purchase. War- deprived of the use of the new Crown product.
ITEMS EXCLUDED FROM THIS ranty work can only be performed at our autho- Repairs and replacement parts provided under the
CROWN WARANTY rized service centers. We will remedy the defect terms of this Crown Warranty shall carry only the
and ship the product from the service center unexpired portion of this Crown Warranty.
This Crown Warranty is in effect only for failure within a reasonable time after receipt of the defec-
of a new Crown product which occurred within tive product at our authorized service center. DESIGN CHANGES
the Warranty Period. It does not cover any prod-
HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY We reserve the right to change the design of any
uct which has been damaged because of any
SERVICE product from time to time without notice and with
intentional misuse, accident, negligence, or loss
no obligation to make corresponding changes in
which is covered under any of your insurance You must notify your local Crown importer of products previously manufactured.
contracts. This Crown Warranty also does not your need for warranty service within the warranty
extend to the new Crown product if the serial period. All components must be shipped in the LEGAL REMEDIES OF PURCHASER
number has been defaced, altered, or removed. original box. Corrective action will be taken within No action to enforce this Crown Warranty shall be
a reasonable time of the date of receipt of the commenced after expiration of the warranty period.
defective product by our authorized service center.
If the repairs made by our authorized service cen- THIS STATEMENT OF WARRANTY SUPERSEDES
ter are not satisfactory, notify our authorized ser- ANY OTHERS CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL FOR
vice center immediately. CROWN PRODUCTS. 7/01

page 26 Operation Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

Crown Factory Service Information

Shipping Address: Crown Factory Service, 1718 W. Mishawaka Rd., Elkhart, IN 46517
Phone: 1-800-342-6939 or 1-574-294-8200 Fax: 1-574-294-8124

Owner’s Name : ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Shipping Address: ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Phone Number: ________________________________Fax Number: ________________________________ Email ________________________________________________________________________________

Model: __________________________________________________________________________________ Serial Number: ________________________________________________________________________

Purchase Date : ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

NATURE OF PROBLEM

(Be sure to describe the conditions that existed when the problem occurred and what attempts were made to correct it.)

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Other equipment in system: ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If warranty has expired, payment will be: ! Cash/Check ! Visa ! Master Card ! C.O.D. ! Purchase Order for Crown Dealer

Card Number:___________________________________ Exp. Date:___________________

Signature:______________________________________________________________________

ENCLOSE THIS PORTION WITH THE UNIT. DO NOT MAIL SEPARATELY.

Operation Manual page 27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2561953A
REV. A Printed 8/03
Printed in U.S.A.

Addendum To Operation Manual

Note: This addendum pertains to Section 3 - Setup

Section 5 - Advanced Features and Options
Section 9 - Service

It is important that you review this addendum before reviewing the Operation
Manual.

Section 3
With reference to the DUAL/MONO mode switch:
Dual mode allows each amplifier channel to operate independently like a stereo amplifier.
Installation is intuitive - input Channel 1 feeds output Channel 1 and input Channel 2 feeds
output Channel 2. To put the amplifier into the Dual mode, turn it off, slide the DUAL/
MONO switch to DUAL, and properly connect the output wiring.

The MONO switch setting is the BRIDGE-MONO mode and is used to drive loads with a
total impedance of at least 4 ohms. For distributed loudspeaker systems, 140 volts (twice the
normal 70- volt output) is produced. To put the amplifier into the Bridge-Mono mode, turn it
off, and slide the DUAL/MONO switch to MONO. Both outputs will receive the signal from
Channel 1 with the output of Channel 2 inverted so it can be bridged with the Channel 1
output. Please note that there is no provision for paralleling the outputs to obtain a
single high-powered 70-volt constant voltage output.

Section 5
Federal Signal will not offer the T- 170V, TP- 170V, or PIP Modules as indicated in Section
5.3 -Options.

Section 9
For any service related issues, please contact Crown Technical Support. Return the unit to
Crown Factory Service, or to a Crown authorized service center if repairs need to be made.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MODELS AR2000-M, AR2000-P AND AR2000-Z
AUDIO ROUTER DEVICES

INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS

2561533C
REV. C 12/01
Printed in U.S.A.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
MODELS AR2000-M, AR2000-P AND AR2000-Z, AUDIO ROUTER DEVICES

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS phone. The unit can also be used to play background
music generated from an external source over the
People’s safety depends on your safe installation
Audio Router system.
of our products. It is important to read, understand
and follow all instructions shipped with this product.
The Model AR2000-M is an audio multiplexing
Selection of mounting location for this device, its device. It is capable of handling two inputs from any
controls and routing of wiring should be made by the of three different selected source voltages of 1, 25 or
Facilities Engineer and the Safety Engineer. Listed 70 volts. The unit has 8 selectable zones which either
below are other important safety instructions and the A or the B source is routed to. There is an all call
precautions you should follow. button that selects all zones. There are also 8 pro-
grammable presets on the unit. The presets are
• This unit must be installed and maintained
initiated by the front panel buttons or by remote
by a qualified electrician in accordance with
contacts wired to the back panel. The front panel
the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) or
also has a monitor speaker jack. A microphone jack
other national or local codes, under the
is also available for use with a MSB-1. The micro-
direction of the local authority having juris-
phone has priority over the two user supplied
diction.
sources. The telephone feature is protected by an 8
• Do not connect this unit to system wiring key password. Options available allow changing the
when circuits are energized. password and recording a message for broadcasting.
Commands entered via the telephone key pad allow
• For optimum sound distribution do not
the user to send a message to specified zones. The
overload the output lines.
microphone and the telephone interface have the
• All audio devices produce loud sounds which, same priority. If the microphone is in use, the tele-
in certain circumstances, may cause perma- phone interface is disabled. If the phone message
nent hearing loss. Take appropriate precau- system is in use, the microphone is disabled.
tions such as wearing hearing protection.
If more than eight zones or eight presets are
Recommendations in OSHA Sound Level
needed by the user, a separate AR2000-Z (See Figure
Standard (29 CFR 1910) should not be ex-
1-2), zone unit, or AR2000-P (See Figure 1-3), preset
ceeded.
unit is available. Each AR2000-Z or AR2000-P unit
• After installation and completion of initial will add an additional eight zone or preset controls
system test, provide a copy of this instruction respectively. Up to seven additional Preset or Zone
sheet to all personnel responsible for opera- units may be added for a total of 64 zones and 64
tion, periodic testing and maintenance of this presets.
equipment.
The Model MNC-1 microphone is a hand held,
noise canceling microphone that is ideal for use as a
I. GENERAL.
local microphone. The Model MSB-1 microphone (See
1-1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION. Figure 1-4) is a base station type microphone de-
signed for desktop operation.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
The Model AR2000-M may be installed in indoor
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
installations only as a rack mounted device.
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
The Model AR2000-M is a rack mount unit that
may cause undesired operation.
will fit any standard 19" rack mount cabinet. The
The Model AR2000-M (see figure 1-1) Audio Model AR2000-M can be used for a variety of priori-
Router, is a UL listed and cUL certified central tized signaling purposes, such as playing background
control device that is capable of routing a selected music, paging, start and dismissal, phone messaging
audio input to specific zones. It can control signals to and other communication applications. Additional
speakers designed for 25Vrms line operation or advantages of the Model AR2000-M include economi-
70Vrms line operation. It can also control 1Vrms cal system expansion and long term system flexibil-
signals intended to be amplified with a separate ity.
amplification device. The AR2000-M has a public
address (PA) function so voice messages or instruc- The Model AR2000-M routes audio signals and
tions can be announced over the Audio Router system applies them through zone outputs to the devices in
through an optional Model MSB-1 or MNC-1 Micro- the system. The AR2000-M connects easily with
-1-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CH A ALL CALL PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8

PHONE ALARM
AUX SPEAKER
FEDERAL
MICROPHONE SIGNAL
CORPORATION
R
UNIVERSITY PARK, IL U.S.A.

CH B ALL CANCEL ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8

POWER

AR2000-M
290A4120-01

Figure 1-1.
Selectone amplified speakers. A Model AM25CK or to be sent to the selected speakers; releasing the
AM70CK Connector Kit is required in each Selectone microphone will allow Channel A or B operation to
device to connect it to the signal line. The Audio resume.
Router device supplies 15W at either 25Vrms or
70Vrms. An additional amplifier must be supplied to Keying the Microphone button will allow the
obtain higher wattage levels. Care must be taken to user to direct audio to specific zones (default is All-
ensure that the total line impedance of all the con- Call). The user may select zones using either indi-
nected devices does not cause the line voltage to drop. vidual speaker or preset buttons; Channel A or B
operation will not be interrupted until the micro-
Each preset can be manually activated locally phone is actually keyed. Releasing the microphone
with its associated push button switch on the front will allow Channel A or B to resume operation on its
panel or with a contact closure at the associated selected speakers.
preset control input on the back panel. Whenever a
preset is activated, either locally or remotely, its Pressing the All Call button (whether the unit is
associated front panel push button LED illuminates in Microphone mode or Channel A/B mode) will cause
to indicate that the preset has been activated. The all zones to be selected. Pressing any individual zone
LED remains lit until the preset is deactivated or the when All Call is lit, however, will cancel all the zones
remote contact closure is removed. As an added except that one.
feature, when a preset is remotely activated, the
associated LED illuminates and flashes until the Pressing All Call will perform the following
remote contact closure is removed. All AR2000-M function:
controls are located on the front panel except gain
adjustments which are made on the back panel If all of the zones are not selected, “All Call” will
during installation. select all 64 zones. Otherwise, pressing “All Call” will
cancel all of the zones.
Operation (normal mode)
Telephone operation
Pressing the Channel A or Channel B button
When the line attached to the Router is called,
will immediately switch the input to that channel;
the router will answer with the Message “ENTER
the speaker indicator lights will indicate what
PASSWORD”. The caller is required to enter their 8
speakers are connected. Pushing a speaker button
digit password. The caller is given 2 chances to enter
will turn that speaker on or off; pushing a preset
the correct password.
button will select speakers per that preset, and may
also select Channel A or B (if that preset was config- If the correct password is not entered, the caller
ured for a specific channel). Keying the microphone hears the message “GOODBYE” and the system
while in this mode will cause the microphone signal hangs up the phone line.

ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8

FEDERAL POWER
SIGNAL
CORPORATION
R
UNIVERSITY PARK, IL U.S.A.

AR2000-Z
290A4120-02

Figure 1-2.
-2-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8
FEDERAL POWER
SIGNAL
CORPORATION
R
UNIVERSITY PARK, IL U.S.A.

AR2000-P
290A4120-03

Figure 1-3.

If the correct password is entered the caller will Default is to all zones. Phone receiving is
hear the message “PRESS 9 KEY TO CHANGE THE disabled during message playback; therefore, subse-
PASSWORD OR 6 KEY TO RECORD A MESSAGE”. quent calls must wait for the current message to be
completed before another recording will take place.
If the caller presses the 9 key, the message
“ENTER NEW PASSWORD” will inform the caller to Preset operation
enter a new password. The same new password must
be entered twice. Otherwise, the caller will hear the The preset optos are a combination of edge and
message “PASSWORD NOT CHANGED” then the level-tripped. If the system sees an active edge on an
message “GOODBYE” and the system hangs up the opto, it will set the input and output relays for the
phone line. If the new password is successfully corresponding preset. The relays will remain set
entered twice, the caller will hear the message until the input goes away.
“PASSWORD CHANGED” then the message Setting a Preset:
“GOODBYE” and the system hangs up the phone
line. To set a preset, select the zones desired for the
preset by pressing and releasing the appropriate zone
If the caller presses the 6 key, the message button. The LED corresponding to that zone will
“RECORD MESSAGE, PRESS # KEY TO BROAD- illuminate. Select the input source (Channel A or
CAST YOUR MESSAGE” prompts the caller to start Channel B) for that preset. Press and hold the
speaking. The message can be up to 90 seconds long. appropriate preset button until it begins to flash.
If the user exceeds 90 second duration, the message The preset is now set.
will not play back.
To recall a preset simply select the preset by
At any time during the call, the caller can enter pressing and releasing the associated preset button.
the # key or hang-up the phone to exit. Also, when a
key input is necessary, the caller has 5 seconds to 1-2. CHASSIS DESCRIPTION.
enter a key or the system hangs up automatically.
The Model AR2000-M is assembled in a black,
The password can be returned to the default sprayed aluminum 3-piece housing approximately
“12345678” by opening the cover of the Router and 17.5” wide by 14.25" deep by 3.5" high. It is intended
setting switch SW1 position #4 to the “ON” position to be rack mounted in a standard 19” rack mount
for 5 seconds with the power “ON”. cabinet.

The housing is held together with eighteen

screws, eight on the front panel, six on the rear panel
and four securing the top to the sides.

The main printed circuit board is attached to the

lower housing with seven screws. Separate wiring
harnesses connect the front and rear boards to the
main printed circuit board. The front panel switches
are designated as CH A, CH B, ALL CALL, CANCEL
ZONE 1 through ZONE 8 and PRESET 1 through
PRESET 8.

The Model AR2000-P is assembled in a black,

sprayed aluminum 3-piece housing approximately
17.5” wide by 10.125" deep by 1.75" high. It is in-
290A4120-04 tended to be rack mounted in a standard 19” rack
mount cabinet. The housing is held together with
Figure 1-4.
-3-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 twelve screws, four on the front panel, four on the 1-4. POWER.
rear panel and four securing the top to the sides. The
WARNING
front panel switches are designated as PRESET 1
through PRESET 8. In order to prevent power to the AR2000-M
from being accidentally turned off, the unit
The Model AR2000-Z is assembled in a black, has a power switch located on the back of the
sprayed aluminum 3-piece housing approximately unit. Before performing any installation or
17.5” wide by 10.125" deep by 1.75" high. It is in- maintenance, ensure that power is discon-
tended to be rack mounted in a standard 19” rack nected.
mount cabinet. The housing is held together with
The front panel has a green LED to indicate the
twelve screws, four on the front panel, four on the
presence of primary power. It also has a red LED to
rear panel and four securing the top to the sides. The
indicate the presence of secondary power in use. The
front panel switches are designated as ZONE 1
AR2000-M can be operated from either a 120VAC,
through ZONE 8.
240VAC or a 24VDC power source. The AC power is
connected via the power cord, which requires manual
1-3. CONTROL CIRCUITRY.
switching in order to operate. 24VDC Backup con-
nects via the rear terminals directly underneath the
A. Control Circuitry.
4-Amp, Bussman-type GMT indicating fuse.
The control circuitry in the AR2000-M has a WARNING
built-in priority level feature. The local microphone
If this unit is to be connected to a non-power
has the highest priority level when activated. If a
limited 24 volt dc supply, the National Electri-
preset is initiated by contact closure, the AR2000-M
cal Code (NFPA 70) requires that those leads
will grant that preset priority. The Audio Router will
be separated from other classes of wiring
store the current selection first, then activate the
connected to this unit.
preset. Once the contact closure is removed, the
AR2000-M will return the system to the previous The AR2000-P and the AR2000-Z obtain power
condition. Pressing cancel will deactivate any cur- directly from the AR2000-M.
rently active selections.
1-5. AUDIO INPUTS.
B. All CALL Pushbutton.
Channel A and Channel B inputs are provided
in the back of the unit to couple standard 1 volt audio
The ALL CALL pushbutton switch selects
signal from a background music source such as a
and connects all zones to the currently selected input
radio receiver, CD player or a tape player. The inputs
source. Pressing the ALL CALL again returns the
can also be selected to accept a 25Vrms or 70Vrms
system to the previous condition.
input source. The Channel A input is selectable from
the front panel by depressing the Channel A selection
C. CANCEL Pushbutton.
button. To select the Channel B input, depress the
The CANCEL pushbutton when pressed will Channel B selection button on the front panel. Only
reset all the manually activated signaling functions Channel A or Channel B may be activated at one
of the AR2000-M. time. It is not possible to activate both Channel A
and Channel B audio sources simultaneously.
D. MONITOR SPKR.
A monitor speaker may be connected to the 1-6. MICROPHONE INPUT OPTION.
unit at this output. Audio to this output will exist
during all conditions except when the microphone is A Federal Signal Model MSB-1 microphone can
in use. This prevents any feedback from the micro- be connected directly to the AR2000-M via the
phone. modular jack provided on the front of the unit (high-
est priority).
E. ADDITIONAL ZONES.
An AR2000-Z may be connected to add on 1-7. TELEPHONE INPUT OPTION.
additional 8 zones of control. If desired, up to seven
(7) total AR2000-Z units may be added to provide a A standard telephone line can be connected
total of 64 zones. directly to the AR2000-M via the modular phone jack
provided at the back of the unit. This allows the user
F. ADDITIONAL PRESETS.
to contact the AR2000-M via phone, record a message
An AR2000-P may be connected to add on and deliver it to zones selected by the phone line
additional 8 presets of control. If desired, up to seven user.
(7) total AR2000-P units may be added to provide a
total of 64 presets.
-4-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1-8. ELECTRICAL DETAILS.

Termination: Screw terminals for 13 AWG to

23 AWG conductors.

Voltage Range: Selectable 120 VAC

or 240 VAC 50/60 Hz.

Battery backup: 24 VDC

Channel A input: Selectable to be 1 Vrms, 25 Vrms,

or 70 Vrms

Channel B input: Selectable to be 1 Vrms, 25 Vrms,

or 70 Vrms

Onboard Amplifier: 15 Watts maximum

Amplifier
Output Voltage: Selectable to be 1 Vrms, 25 Vrms,
or 70 Vrms

Frequency range: -3dB @ 150 Hz -3dB @ 12 kHz

(no load) -6dB @ 85 Hz -6dB @ 24.8 kHz

Monitor Speaker
output: 300mW typical @ 1 kHz, 8 ohm

Maximum switching
current for each zone: 15 AMPS

-5-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 II. SPECIFICATIONS.

2-1. AR2000-M POWER INPUT.

Input Voltage 120V,50-60HZ

Standby Current 350 mA
Operating Current 2A
Power Consumption 240 Watts
Input Voltage 240V, 50-60HZ
Standby Current 160 mA
Operating Current 1A
Power Consumption 160 Watts

2-2. EMERGENCY POWER SOURCE INPUT.

Input Voltage 24 VDC

Standby Current 650 mA
Operating Current 4A

2-3. AUDIO INPUT.

A. Local PA (Use optional Model MSB-1 microphone)

Input Impedance 5k Ohms
Input Voltage 16 mVrms (MAX)

B. Channel A / Channel B
Input Impedance 28.87 K ohms @ 1 Vrms position
22.67 K ohms @ 25 Vrms position
22.10 K ohms @ 70 Vrms position
Input Voltage Selectable at 1Vrms, 25Vrms or 70 Vrms

2-4. AUDIO OUTPUTS.

A. Output Impedance
Balanced Sig. line 27 Ohms

B. Output Voltage Levels no Load

Balanced Signal Line @70Volt position 70Vrms
Balanced Signal Line @25Volt position 25Vrms
Balanced Signal Line @1Volt position 1-20Vrms

2-5. REMOTE PRESET ACTIVATION CIRCUIT.

NOTE: It is recommended that the installer use shielded, twisted pair wire in order to minimize any false
activation due to environmental noise.

Type Dry Contact Closure

Line Impedance 1 K ohm (MAX)
Circuit Current 20 mA Max (12VDC)

2-6. REMOTE MIC. ACTIVATION CIRCUIT (PTT).

Type Dry Contact Closure

Line Impedance 100 Ohm (MAX)
Circuit Current 10MA Max (12VDC)

-6-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2-7. RELAY CONTACT CLOSURE OUTPUTS.

Relays
Type: Dry Contact Closure
Rating: 15A maximum current per zone

2-8. FUSE.

F1 Type GMC 2A, 250V

F2 Bussman-type GMT 4A

2-9. PHYSICAL.

A. AR2000-M
Weight 16 lb 8 oz. (7.5 kg.)
Dimensions (HWD) 3.5" x 17 3/8" x 14.25"
89mm x 442mm x 362mm
Case Material 14GA Aluminum

B. AR2000-P
Weight 3 lb, 15 oz. (1.8 kg)
Dimensions (HWD) 1.75" x 17 3/8” x 10.125"
44.5mm x 442mm x 257mm
Case Material 14GA Aluminum

C. AR2000-P
Weight 3 lb, 15 oz. (1.8 kg)
Dimensions (HWD) 1.75" x 17 3/8” x 10.125"
44.5mm x 442mm x 257mm
Case Material 14GA Aluminum

2-10. AGENCY APPROVALS.

A. UL AND cUL Certifications.

UL 813, (AZJX) Commercial Audio and Radio Equipment, Systems and accessories
C22.2 No. 1-98, (AZJX7) Audio, Video, and Similar Electronic Equipment

B. CSA Certification-Pending
C22.2 No. 1-98, Audio, Video, and Similar Electronic Equipment

C. FCC.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

-7-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 III. INSTALLATION. The AR2000-P provides four (4) holes for mount-
ing in a standard rack. It utilizes a space of 1U.
SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS
The AR2000-Z provides four (4) holes for mount-
Peoples lives depend on proper installation of ing in a standard rack. It utilizes a space of 1U.
our products. It is important to follow all instructions
shipped with these products. These devices are to be 3-3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS.
installed by a qualified electrician in accordance with
the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70), or other DANGER
national or local codes, under the direction of the
local authority having jurisdiction. To avoid electrical shock and damage to the
device, do not attempt to connect wires when
The selection of the mounting location for the
power is on.
device, its controls and routing of the wiring is to be
accomplished under the direction of the Facilities
Terminal blocks are supplied on the AR2000-M
Engineer and the Safety Engineer. In addition, listed
for field wiring. Strip 1/2" of insulation from the
below are some other important safety instructions
wiring leads. Attach the appropriate wires to the
and precautions you should follow:
corresponding terminals. Tighten the screws to
• Read and understand all instructions before insure that the wires are firmly held in place. The
installing or operating this equipment. terminals will accept conductor sizes 23 AWG to 13
AWG.
• Do not connect this unit to the system when
power is on.
3-4. SIGNAL LINES.
• Speakers connected to this system can pro-
duce loud sounds which may cause, in certain A. The signal lines transfer the tone signals
situations, permanent hearing loss. You and verbal messages from the AR2000-M to the
should take appropriate precautions such as selected zones and their devices. In order to reduce
wearing hearing protection. the possibility of cross talk, hum and static noise
pick-up, the signal lines must be twisted pair,
• After installation, test the Audio Router
shielded audio cable. Although the majority of sys-
sound system to ensure proper operation.
tems use AWG 18 shielded twisted pair audio cables,
the size of the audio cable should be adjusted to
• Show these instructions to your Safety
correspond to the level of audio being routed in your
Engineer and then file them in a safe place
application.
and refer to them when maintaining and/or
reinstalling the unit.
CAUTION
• Establish a procedure to routinely check the
sound system for proper activation and If too small a wire gauge is used, unaccept-
operation. able signal voltage drop in the signal line will
cause reduced sound output from the remote
• Consult the authority having jurisdiction in
signal device. Only use a cable having wire
your area regarding the proper use and
gauge greater than 22AWG.
installation of this product.
B. Federal does not recommend that new or
3-1. UNPACKING.
existing telephone lines be used as signal lines in an
After unpacking the unit, examine it for damage Audio Router system for the following reasons:
that may have occurred in transit. If equipment has
been damaged, do not attempt to install or operate it. 1. Interference from other services or
File a claim immediately with the carrier stating the systems, or interference from the system to other
extent of the damage. Carefully check all envelopes, services.
shipping labels and tags before removing or destroy- 2. Cross talk, interference or hum induced
ing them. by other telephone lines.
3. Extended downtime because of the second
3-2. MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS. party involvement required to service the lines.
4. The additional cost of installation, inter-
The AR2000-M provides four (4) holes for
facing devices and monthly charges as opposed to a
mounting in a standard rack. It utilizes a space of 2U.
one-time cost of performing the installation.

-8-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3-5. MODEL AR2000-M SIGNAL AR2000-M to the 70 Vrms position. The output audio
CONNECTIONS. must be connected using 16GA wire from AUDIO
OUT to AUDIO IN FROM EXTERNAL AMP. The
CAUTION Gain may be adjusted using the AUDIO OUT VOL-
UME control knob.
Crosstalk can occur between signal lines and
power lines, causing confusing messages,
C. 25 Vrms Signal Line Application.
which interfere with the capability of this
equipment.
The AR2000-M has provision for connecting
Do not install signal lines in the same conduit 25 Vrms line operated speakers to its output. Connect
with power lines. Avoid routing signal lines on the 25 Vrms line at the terminals of Zone 1 – Zone 8
cable trays with high voltage power lines. terminal block(s). Connect the speakers in parallel to
this line using 25 Vrms line tap. This output is
To connect the signal lines of the system to the selected by setting the switch on the back of the
AR2000-M, connect a color-coded shielded twisted AR2000-M to the 25 Vrms position. The output audio
pair of audio cables having conductors no smaller must be connected using 16GA wire from AUDIO
than 18 AWG to + and - of each zone output being OUT to AUDIO IN FROM EXTERNAL AMP. The
utilized to the appropriate remote device(s). (See Gain may be adjusted using the AUDIO OUT VOL-
figure 3-1.) Every remote signaling device in the UME control knob.
system will be connected in parallel to these lines.
When connecting the remote devices in parallel to the D. Low Level Audio Output.
signal lines, observe the correct polarity and install
wire nuts over the connections. The AR2000-M also has provision for 1 volt
audio output that can be switched to each zone for
NOTE: If using the supplied amplifier or an external individual external amplification. This low level
amplifier, the output audio must be connected using output is available at the same terminals as in B and
appropriate wire from AUDIO OUT to AUDIO IN C above. This output is selected by setting the
FROM EXTERNAL AMP. If using the on-board switch on the back of the AR2000-M to the 1 Vrms
amplifier, directly connect the AUDIO IN FROM position. The output audio must also be connected
EXTERNAL AMP to the AUDIO OUT terminals on using 18-20GA wire from AUDIO OUT to AUDIO IN
the back of the AR2000-M. See section 3-4 for recom- FROM EXTERNAL AMP. The Gain may be adjusted
mended wire sizes. using the AUDIO OUT VOLUME control knob. It
can also be connected to an analog fiber optic trans-
3-6. CONNECTION TO REMOTE DEVICES. mitter so that audio can be transmitted over a fiber
optic link in an electrically noisy environment.
Physically install the remote device(s); follow the
installation instructions packed with the device. E. External Amplifier Connection for Alternate
Power Audio Output.
A. 300GC, 300GCX, 300X, 302GC, 302GCX,
302X, 50GC, and 50GCB. The AR2000-M also has provision to connect
an external amplifier, such as the Federal Signal
To connect these models to a 25Vrms or HP440,to be switched to the corresponding zones.
70Vrms signal line, a Model AM25CK or AM70CK Set the Audio Router up as listed in D above. Con-
connector card must be used. See figure 3-1 and nect the 1 volt AUDIO OUT to the audio input of
instructions below for the appropriate signal line another amplifier. The output audio must be con-
voltage. nected using appropriate wire gauge for the applica-
tion to the AUDIO IN FROM EXTERNAL AMP (See
B. 70 Vrms Signal Line Application. figure 3-2.) The Gain may be adjusted using the
AUDIO OUT VOLUME control knob.
The AR2000-M has provision for connecting
70 Vrms line operated speakers to its output. Connect CAUTION
the 70 Vrms line at the terminals of Zone 1 – Zone 8
terminal block(s). Connect the speakers in parallel to Careful attention should be paid in order to
this line using 70 Vrms line tap. This output is make sure orientation of the signal is not
selected by setting the switch on the back of the reversed.

-9-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 (CLASS 2) POWER WARNING: NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
OPTO CONTROL IN MONITOR
OUT TO AR2000-P
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
COMMON +24V FROM PRESET
PHONE MICROPHONE SPEAKER
DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
VOLUME VOLUME VOLUME
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE,
REPLACE ONLY WITH GMC 2A, 250V FUSE

DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.) DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.) AUDIO OUT CH B CH A

GND +24V ALL CALL VOLUME VOLUME VOLUME
POWER OUT
TO PRESET
ABOVE
AUDIO OUT CH B INPUT CH A INPUT
PHONE LINE
CAUTION: TO REDUCE SELECT SELECT SELECT
NUMBER
THE RISK OF FIRE, PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8 AUDIO IN FROM EXTERNAL AMP ( ) 1Vrms 1V 1V
REPLACE ONLY WITH rms rms
OR FROM AUDIO OUT 15W
BUSS 250V, 4A GMT FUSE - + 25Vrms 25V 25V
rms rms
ALARM (CLASS 2) AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT
INDICATOR - + POWER OUT 70Vrms 70V 70V
rms rms
TO AR2000-Z ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8
AUDIO OUT(15W) CH B INPUT CH A INPUT
GND +24V - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + CONTROL OUT - + - + - +
AUDIO OUT TO ZONE
TO BELOW
(CLASS 2)24VDC
120 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 2A
240 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 1A BACKUP POWER

SIGNAL LINES SIGNAL LINES

SHIELDED SHIELDED
TWISTED PAIR TWISTED PAIR

300GC 300GC 300GC 300GC 300GC 300GC 300GC 300GC

MODEL AR2000-M WITH MODEL 300GC

CONNECTIONS USING INTERNAL AMPLIFIER

AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK

HI (+) WHT
LOW (-) WHT

120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 290A4120-05B

Figure 3-1.
3-7. POWER CONNECTIONS. A. Local Power (see figure 3-3).

The two basic methods of supplying power to an In this system, power is supplied to the
Audio Router device are 120VAC 50/60Hz Local AR2000-M device by connecting it to a 120VAC or
Power or 240VAC 50/60Hz Local Power and 24VDC 240VAC supply in the immediate vicinity of the
Backup Power. The following paragraphs describe device. An input selector switch is provided and must
each method along with the advantages and disad- be set to the appropriate input voltage prior to
vantages of each. turning the device on.

(CLASS 2) POWER WARNING: NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

OPTO CONTROL IN MONITOR
OUT TO AR2000-P
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
COMMON +24V FROM PRESET
PHONE MICROPHONE SPEAKER
DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
VOLUME VOLUME VOLUME
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE,
REPLACE ONLY WITH GMC 2A, 250V FUSE

DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.) DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.) AUDIO OUT CH B CH A

GND +24V ALL CALL VOLUME VOLUME VOLUME
POWER OUT
TO PRESET
ABOVE
AUDIO OUT CH B INPUT CH A INPUT
PHONE LINE
CAUTION: TO REDUCE SELECT SELECT SELECT
NUMBER
THE RISK OF FIRE, PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8 AUDIO IN FROM EXTERNAL AMP ( ) 1Vrms 1V 1V
REPLACE ONLY WITH rms rms
OR FROM AUDIO OUT 15W
BUSS 250V, 4A GMT FUSE - + 25Vrms 25V 25V
rms rms
ALARM (CLASS 2) AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT
INDICATOR - + POWER OUT 70Vrms 70V 70V
rms rms
TO AR2000-Z ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8
AUDIO OUT(15W) CH B INPUT CH A INPUT
GND +24V - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + CONTROL OUT - + - + - +
AUDIO OUT TO ZONE
TO BELOW
(CLASS 2)24VDC
120 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 2A
240 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 1A BACKUP POWER

SIGNAL LINES
SHIELDED
TWISTED PAIR

300GC 300GC 300GC 300GC 300GC 300GC 300GC 300GC

AMP HP440 AMP

OUTPUT INPUT

AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK

MODEL AR2000-M WITH MODEL 300GC

HI (+) WHT
CONNECTIONS USING EXTERNAL AMPLIFIER
LOW (-) WHT

120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 290A4120-06B

Figure 3-2.

-10-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 (CLASS 2) POWER WARNING: NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
OPTO CONTROL IN MONITOR
OUT TO AR2000-P
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
COMMON +24V FROM PRESET
PHONE MICROPHONE SPEAKER
DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
VOLUME VOLUME VOLUME
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE,
REPLACE ONLY WITH GMC 2A, 250V FUSE

DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.) DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.) AUDIO OUT CH B CH A

GND +24V ALL CALL VOLUME VOLUME VOLUME
POWER OUT
TO PRESET
ABOVE
AUDIO OUT CH B INPUT CH A INPUT
PHONE LINE
CAUTION: TO REDUCE SELECT SELECT SELECT
NUMBER
THE RISK OF FIRE, PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8 AUDIO IN FROM EXTERNAL AMP ( ) 1Vrms 1V 1V
REPLACE ONLY WITH rms rms
OR FROM AUDIO OUT 15W
BUSS 250V, 4A GMT FUSE - + 25Vrms 25V 25V
rms rms
ALARM (CLASS 2) AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT
INDICATOR - + POWER OUT 70Vrms 70V 70V
rms rms
TO AR2000-Z ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8
AUDIO OUT(15W) CH B INPUT CH A INPUT
GND +24V - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + CONTROL OUT - + - + - +
AUDIO OUT TO ZONE
TO BELOW
(CLASS 2)24VDC
120 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 2A
240 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 1A BACKUP POWER

- +

PS600

24VDC
BACKUP POWER
TO 120VAC 290A4120-07B

Figure 3-3.
CAUTION power the local Audio Router Device. If the PS600 is
used, it is not necessary to switch the power source if
Improper installation could render this a power failure occurs.
system inoperable, interfering with the
indicating nature of this product. The instal- 3. Disadvantages of Backup Power System.
lation must conform to applicable local and/or
National Electrical codes. a. A separate power source for all
remote devices is required. Heavy power lines are
If an emergency power source is required, a required from that power source to the remote
backup power system described below should be devices in the system. The size of the power lines is
employed. dependent upon the number of amplifiers and the
total distance of the power loop in order to minimize
WARNING the voltage drop while a signal is being routed.
If the AR2000-M is to be connected to a non- b. Future expansion is limited by the
power limited 24 volt dc supply, the National current capacity of the power source and the power
Electrical Code (NFPA70) requires that those lines that were initially installed.
leads be separated from other classes of c. Central power installations must
wiring connected to this unit. comply with local electrical codes. Most power cir-
cuits are Class I circuits. Therefore, conduit will
B. Backup Power (See figure 3-3). probably be required. Installation costs are higher
than a local power system.
1. General.
C. AR2000-M System Power Connections.
In the backup power system all of the
local power lines are connected in parallel to one DANGER
centrally located power source of 24VDC.
Installation with the system power on could
2. Advantages of the Backup Power System. cause serious injury or death. Do not perform
any installation or maintenance on this
a. The entire system may be indepen- system when power is on. Ensure that the
dent of local line voltage. power is disconnected before proceeding.
b. The entire system can be switched to WARNING
an emergency standby power source in the event of a
power failure. This device is to be installed by a trained
electrician who is thoroughly familiar with
c. The central power system has the the national electrical code (NFPA 70) and
added advantage that an auxiliary power supply, local codes and will follow the guidelines.
such as the Federal Model PS600 can be used to
-11-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WARNING 3-8. CONNECTIONS TO REMOTE SWITCHES.
If this unit is to be connected to a non-power
The AR2000-M presets can be activated re-
limited 24 volt dc supply, the National Electri-
motely by any normally open low current switch
cal Code (NFPA70) requires that those leads
contacts having a current capacity of at least 50 mA
be separated from other classes of wiring
inductive. Figure 3-6 illustrates the connection of
connected to this unit.
switch contacts to the AR2000-M. S1, S2, S3 and S4
represents remote switch contacts such as those
CAUTION
found in flow switches, program clocks, heat detec-
Cross talk, interference, or hum can be tors, and smoke detectors. The remotely activated
induced in signal lines, causing poor audio presets function as long as the activating contacts
output or confusing messages, which inter- remain closed. A jumper needs to be placed across
feres with the capability of this equipment. OPTO COMMON and the provided +24V terminal
Do not install power lines in the same conduit next to it on the back of the AR2000-M in order for
as signal lines. the remotely activated presets to function. A remote
switch may be connected to the ALL CALL position if
Operating power is connected to AR2000-M
desired. These are all Normally Open contacts that
by merely inserting the plug end of the line cord into
initiate with contact closure and remain active until
any standard 120 volt, 60 Hz outlet. The AR2000-M is
the contact is opened again.
factory set for 120VAC 50/60Hz operation. If 240 volt
operation is preferred, the input block provides a
3-9. INPUT SOURCE CONNECTIONS.
switch that must be set to this position in order to
function at 240 VAC operation.
WARNING
If it is desired to use 24 VDC either as a
Installation or maintenance on AR2000-M
primary or auxiliary source of power, connect the “+”
when power is on can result in serious injury
terminal of 24 volt DC power supply to the “+”
or death. Do not perform any installation or
terminal at the 24VDC BACKUP POWER terminal
maintenance to the system when power is on.
on the AR2000-M and “-” terminal of the 24 VDC
power supply to the “-“ terminal at the 24VDC
Set selector for CH A to the appropriate input
BACKUP POWER terminal on the AR2000-M located
voltage, 1Vrms, 25Vrms or 70Vrms. Connect the “+”
in the back of the device. (See figure 3-3.)
of the source device to the “+” terminal at the Chan-
nel A input. Connect the “-“ of the source device to
D. AR2000-P and AR2000-Z Power Connections.
the “-“ terminal at the Channel A input. Repeat this
Operating power is connected to AR2000-P process for the Channel B input. CH A and CH B
and AR2000-Z by merely connecting 24 VDC from the volume controls are available just above each input
AR2000-M to each unit. A terminal block is provided selector to allow the input gain to be adjusted.
at the rear-left side of each unit for power connection.
Observe and maintain proper polarity when wiring CAUTION
the power to these units. Connect the “+” terminal of
the AR2000-M to the “+” terminal of the AR2000-P at Be certain to set the input selector switch to
the “+” terminal located in the back of device. Con- the appropriate input voltage to avoid dam-
nect the “-” terminal of the AR2000-M to the “-” age to the unit and the device being con-
terminal of the AR2000-P at the “-” terminal located nected.
in the back of device. An additional 24VDC power
outlet is provided on each AR2000-P and AR2000-Z 3-10. COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS for
for daisy-chaining the power to each sub-unit. Re- AR2000-P and AR2000-Z.
peat for each AR2000-P and AR2000-Z.
WARNING
Setup for the AR2000-P presets is done in the
same way as the AR2000-M presets. (See figure 3-4.)
It is important that the communication lines
Setup for the AR2000-Z zones is done in the be properly connected to their respective
same way as the AR2000-M. An audio input is communication port. Failure to connect the
provided on each unit to be routed to each of the cables properly will damage the devices and
zones it selects. This audio should be connected by possibly render them inoperable.
wiring a connection from the master audio output to
the provided input terminals. (See figure 3-5.) Each The label on the back of each device indicates
additional AR2000-Z should obtain audio in the same where the communication cable link should be
manner from the unit above. (See figure 3-5.) connected. See figure 3-6 for appropriate placement.

-12-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 (CLASS 2) POWER OUT WARNING: NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE OPTO COMMON +24V
TO AR2000-P
THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES,
CAUTION
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.) BEFORE CONTROL IN
(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED,
INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
INSTALLATION FROM PRESET
DISCONNECT ABOVE
POWER

(CLASS 2) POWER IN FROM

GND +24V
AR2000-M OR AR2000-P PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8 NOT USED CONTROL OUT
WARNING TO PRESET
CONNECT CABLES BELOW
TO PROPER
AR2000-P JACK

SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD

TWISTED TWISTED TWISTED TWISTED TWISTED TWISTED TWISTED TWISTED
PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR
INSTALL JUMPER WIRE
18 GA, 3" TO 4" LONG
NORMALLY NORMALLY NORMALLY NORMALLY NORMALLY NORMALLY NORMALLY NORMALLY
OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN
CONTACTS CONTACTS CONTACTS CONTACTS CONTACTS CONTACTS CONTACTS CONTACTS
24VDC
FROM
REMOTE REMOTE REMOTE REMOTE REMOTE REMOTE REMOTE REMOTE MODULAR CABLE
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
AR2000-M DEVICE DEVICE DEVICE DEVICE DEVICE DEVICE DEVICE DEVICE FROM AR2000-M
* * * * * * * *
* EXAMPLE OF REMOTE SWITCHES MAY INCLUDE SENSORS, AR2000-P
DOOR TRIGGER SWITCHES, PANEL SWITCHES, OR OTHER TYPICAL REMOTE PRESET CONFIGURATION 290A4120-08B

Figure 3-4.

A. Connecting a Model AR2000-Z. Decide which channel will get the CD player
connected to it. Using CH A as an example, set the
Using the provided 8 position modular cable,
voltage selector for the Ch A input to the 1 Vrms
connect the bottom communication port of the
position. Connect the “+” input of CH A to the “+”
AR2000-M to the top port of the AR2000-Z. (See
output of the CD player. Connect the “-” input of CH
section 3-7 part D for an explanation of the power
A to the “-” output of the CD player. (See figure 3-7.)
connection to this unit.)
An input level adjust exists just above the input
B. Connecting a Model AR2000-P. selector switch for each input channel. Adjust the
input level as needed.
Using the provided 8-position modular cable,
connect the top communication port of the AR2000-M
B. Connecting a 300VSC-1044-1 or 300MB to the
to the bottom port of the AR2000-P. (Refer to para-
Audio Router.
graph 3-7.D. for an explanation of the power connec-
tion to this unit.)
Disconnect power from the AR2000-M.
3-11. TYPICAL CONNECTION EXAMPLES Connect the output of either device to the CH B input
in the same manner as detailed for the CD player. Be
A. Connecting a CD Player to the Audio Router.
sure to set the input voltage selector to the appropri-
Disconnect power from the AR2000-M. ate voltage. (See figure 3-7.)

(CLASS 2) POWER IN FROM

WARNING: NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE
THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
AR2000-M OR AR2000-Z
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES,
AUDIO IN
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND
CAUTION
(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED,
INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. AUDIO OUT BEFORE
INSTALLATION
CONTROL IN
FROM ZONE
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8 DISCONNECT ABOVE
POWER
GND +24V
OUT TO AR2000-Z - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + AUDIO OUT CONTROL OUT
WARNING TO ZONE
(CLASS 2) POWER

CONNECT CABLES BELOW

TO PROPER
AR2000-Z JACK

SHIELD SHIELD TWISTED

TWISTED PAIR FROM
PAIR AR2000-M AUDIO MODULAR CABLE
SHIELD FROM AR2000-M
TWISTED
PAIR
24VDC
300GC 300GC 300GC 300GC 300GC 300GC 300GC 300GC
FROM
AR2000-M

AR2000-Z
TYPICAL ZONE CONFIGURATION
AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK AM25CK

120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC

290A4120-09B

Figure 3-5.

-13-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JUMPER WIRE

(CLASS 2) POWER OUT WARNING: NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE OPTO COMMON +24V
TO AR2000-P
THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES,
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: BEFORE CONTROL IN
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.)
(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INSTALLATION FROM PRESET
INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
DISCONNECT ABOVE
POWER
GND +24V
AR2000-M OR AR2000-P PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8 NOT USED CONTROL OUT
WARNING TO PRESET
CONNECT CABLES BELOW
TO PROPER
AR2000-P JACK

(CLASS 2) POWER IN FROM

SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TWISTED
BLACK PAIR RED

JUMPER WIRE

(CLASS 2) POWER OUT WARNING: NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE OPTO COMMON +24V
TO AR2000-P
THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES,
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: BEFORE CONTROL IN
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.)
(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INSTALLATION FROM PRESET
INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
DISCONNECT ABOVE
POWER
GND +24V
AR2000-M OR AR2000-P PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8 NOT USED CONTROL OUT
WARNING TO PRESET
CONNECT CABLES BELOW
TO PROPER
AR2000-P JACK

(CLASS 2) POWER IN FROM

SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TWISTED
BLACK PAIR RED

JUMPER WIRE

(CLASS 2) POWER OUT WARNING: NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE OPTO COMMON +24V
TO AR2000-P
THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES,
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: BEFORE CONTROL IN
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.)
(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INSTALLATION FROM PRESET
INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
DISCONNECT ABOVE
POWER
GND +24V
AR2000-M OR AR2000-P PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8 NOT USED CONTROL OUT
WARNING TO PRESET
CONNECT CABLES BELOW
TO PROPER
AR2000-P JACK

(CLASS 2) POWER IN FROM

SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TWISTED
BLACK PAIR RED

JUMPER WIRE

(CLASS 2) POWER OUT WARNING: NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE OPTO COMMON +24V
TO AR2000-P
THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES,
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: BEFORE CONTROL IN
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.)
(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INSTALLATION FROM PRESET
INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
DISCONNECT ABOVE
POWER
GND +24V
AR2000-M OR AR2000-P PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8 NOT USED CONTROL OUT
WARNING TO PRESET
CONNECT CABLES BELOW
TO PROPER
AR2000-P JACK

(CLASS 2) POWER IN FROM

SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TWISTED SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH

PAIR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BLACK RED
JUMPER WIRE
(CLASS 2) POWER WARNING: NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
OPTO CONTROL IN MONITOR
OUT TO AR2000-P COMMON +24V PHONE MICROPHONE SPEAKER
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, FROM PRESET
DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
VOLUME VOLUME VOLUME

DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.) DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.) AUDIO OUT CH B CH A

GND +24V ALL CALL VOLUME VOLUME VOLUME
POWER OUT
TO PRESET
ABOVE
AUDIO OUT CH B INPUT CH A INPUT
PHONE LINE
CAUTION: TO REDUCE SELECT SELECT SELECT
NUMBER
THE RISK OF FIRE, PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8 AUDIO IN FROM EXTERNAL AMP ( ) 1Vrms 1V 1V
REPLACE ONLY WITH rms rms
OR FROM AUDIO OUT 15W
BUSS 250V, 4A GMT FUSE - + 25Vrms 25V 25V
rms rms
ALARM (CLASS 2) AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT
INDICATOR - + POWER OUT 70Vrms 70V 70V
rms rms
TO AR2000-Z ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8
AUDIO OUT(15W) CH B INPUT CH A INPUT
GND +24V - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + CONTROL OUT - + - + - +

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE,

REPLACE ONLY WITH GMC 2A, 250V FUSE
AUDIO OUT
TO ZONE
TO BELOW
(CLASS 2)24VDC
120 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 2A
240 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 1A BACKUP POWER

TWISTED TWISTED
BLACK PAIR RED BLUE PAIR YELLOW

(CLASS 2) POWER IN FROM

WARNING: NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE
AR2000-M OR AR2000-Z THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. AUDIO IN
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES,
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: CAUTION
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND
(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, BEFORE CONTROL IN
INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. AUDIO OUT INSTALLATION FROM ZONE
ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8 DISCONNECT ABOVE
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 POWER
GND +24V
OUT TO AR2000-Z - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + AUDIO OUT CONTROL OUT
WARNING TO ZONE
CONNECT CABLES BELOW
TO PROPER
JACK

(CLASS 2) POWER
AR2000-Z

TWISTED TWISTED
BLACK PAIR RED BLUE PAIR YELLOW

(CLASS 2) POWER IN FROM

WARNING: NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE
AR2000-M OR AR2000-Z THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. AUDIO IN
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES,
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: CAUTION
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND
(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, BEFORE CONTROL IN
INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. AUDIO OUT INSTALLATION FROM ZONE
ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8 DISCONNECT ABOVE
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 POWER
GND +24V
OUT TO AR2000-Z - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + AUDIO OUT CONTROL OUT
WARNING TO ZONE
CONNECT CABLES BELOW
TO PROPER
JACK

(CLASS 2) POWER
AR2000-Z

TWISTED TWISTED
BLACK PAIR RED BLUE PAIR YELLOW

(CLASS 2) POWER IN FROM

WARNING: NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE
AR2000-M OR AR2000-Z THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. AUDIO IN
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES,
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: CAUTION
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND
(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, BEFORE CONTROL IN
INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. AUDIO OUT INSTALLATION FROM ZONE
ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8 DISCONNECT ABOVE
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 POWER
GND +24V
OUT TO AR2000-Z - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + AUDIO OUT CONTROL OUT
WARNING TO ZONE
CONNECT CABLES BELOW
TO PROPER
JACK

(CLASS 2) POWER
AR2000-Z

TWISTED TWISTED
BLACK PAIR RED BLUE PAIR YELLOW

(CLASS 2) POWER IN FROM

WARNING: NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE
AR2000-M OR AR2000-Z THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. AUDIO IN
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES,
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: CAUTION
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND
(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, BEFORE CONTROL IN
INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. AUDIO OUT INSTALLATION FROM ZONE
ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8 DISCONNECT ABOVE
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 POWER
GND +24V
OUT TO AR2000-Z - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + AUDIO OUT CONTROL OUT
WARNING TO ZONE
CONNECT CABLES BELOW
TO PROPER
JACK

(CLASS 2) POWER
AR2000-Z

LEFT RIGHT

CD PLAYER

GROUND
SIGNAL LINES SHIELDED
120VAC TWISTED PAIR

SPLIT OR CONNECT TO
300MB ONLY LEFT OR RIGHT CHANNEL

- +
SIGNAL SIGNAL LINES SHIELDED
PS600 GAIN + - TWISTED PAIR
10 1 CENTER 17 14 13 1

-14-
TB-2 TB-1
24VDC

Figure 3-6.
BATTERY 120VAC
BACKUP
WARNING
IF THE AR2000-M IS TO BE CONNECTED TO A NON-POWER LIMITED 24 VOLT DC SUPPLY, SECTION 725-54,
EXCEPTION 2.b.1 OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NFPA 70) INDICATES THAT THOSE LEADS MUST BE SEPARATED
BY A MINIMUM OF 0.25 IN.(6.35mm) FROM ALL OTHER CONDUCTORS CONNECTED TO THIS EQUIPMENT. 290A4120-11B
 (CLASS 2) POWER WARNING: NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
OPTO CONTROL IN MONITOR
OUT TO AR2000-P
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
COMMON +24V FROM PRESET
PHONE MICROPHONE SPEAKER
DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
VOLUME VOLUME VOLUME
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE,
REPLACE ONLY WITH GMC 2A, 250V FUSE

DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.) DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.) AUDIO OUT CH B CH A

GND +24V ALL CALL VOLUME VOLUME VOLUME
POWER OUT
TO PRESET
ABOVE
AUDIO OUT CH B INPUT CH A INPUT
PHONE LINE
CAUTION: TO REDUCE SELECT SELECT SELECT
NUMBER
THE RISK OF FIRE, PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8 AUDIO IN FROM EXTERNAL AMP ( ) 1Vrms 1V 1V
REPLACE ONLY WITH rms rms
OR FROM AUDIO OUT 15W
BUSS 250V, 4A GMT FUSE - + 25Vrms 25V 25V
rms rms
ALARM (CLASS 2) AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT
INDICATOR - + POWER OUT 70Vrms 70V 70V
rms rms
TO AR2000-Z ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8
AUDIO OUT(15W) CH B INPUT CH A INPUT
GND +24V - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + CONTROL OUT - + - + - +
AUDIO OUT TO ZONE
TO BELOW
(CLASS 2)24VDC
120 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 2A
240 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 1A BACKUP POWER

LEFT RIGHT

CD PLAYER

SIGNAL LINES SHIELDED

GROUND TWISTED PAIR

120VAC
SPLIT OR CONNECT TO
ONLY LEFT OR RIGHT CHANNEL

300MB

SIGNAL SIGNAL LINES SHIELDED

TYPICAL CONNECTION
GAIN + - TWISTED PAIR CD PLAYER AND MODEL 300MB
10 1 CENTER 17 14 13 1

TB-2 TB-1

120VAC 290A4120-10B

Figure 3-7.

IV. TESTING/OPERATING. 4-1. After completion of installation be sure to test

the system to verify that each unit operates satisfac-
WARNING
torily.
Failure to follow all safety precautions and
instructions may result in property damage, 4-2. Provide a copy of these instructions for the
serious injury, or possible death to you or Safety Engineer(s), System Operators(s) and Mainte-
others. nance personal.

WARNING 4-3. TELEPHONE FUNCTION COMMANDS.

Under certain conditions these devices are
A. Changing the Password.
capable of transferring sound loud enough to
cause hearing damage. Adequate hearing
When the line attached to the Router is
protection should be worn if standing within
called, the Router will answer with the message
close proximity to the device while testing.
“ENTER PASSWORD”. Enter your 8 digit password.
Recommendations in OSHA Sound Level
Standard (29CFR 1910) should not be ex-
Then the caller will hear the message
ceeded.
“PRESS 9 KEY TO CHANGE THE PASSWORD OR
6 KEY TO RECORD A MESSAGE”.
SAFETY MESSAGE TO OPERATORS
Although your Multiplexing system is operat- Press the 9 key, the message “ENTER NEW
ing properly it may not be completely effec- PASSWORD” will inform the caller to enter a new
tive. People may not hear or heed your password. The same new password must be entered
messages. You must recognize this fact and twice. The caller will hear the message “PASSWORD
ensure that your messages achieve their CHANGED” then the message “GOODBYE” and the
intended effect through proper test and system hangs up the phone line.
training sequences suitable for your specific
application(s). The password can be returned to the default
“12345678” by opening the cover of the Router and

-15-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 setting switch SW1 to position #4 to the “ON” posi- message will be sent to Zones 1, 4 and 6 of the Master
tion for 5 seconds with the power “ON”. unit (Bank 1).

B. Recording a Message for Broadcast. For example: If there is one AR2000-Z unit
connected to the AR2000-M, then it is on Bank 2. To
When the line attached to the Router is
send a message to only Zone 4 of the AR2000-Z in
called, the Router will answer with the message
Bank 2, key in the following after recording a mes-
“ENTER PASSWORD”. Enter your 8 digit password.
sage: key in [*], [2], [4], and then press the [#] key
Then the caller will hear the message and hang up. The message will be sent only to Zone 4
“PRESS 9 KEY TO CHANGE THE PASSWORD OR of Bank 2.
6 KEY TO RECORD A MESSAGE”.
For example: If there are two AR2000-Z units
Press the 6 key, the message “RECORD connected to the AR2000-M, then they are on Bank 2
MESSAGE, PRESS # KEY TO BROADCAST YOUR and on Bank 3. To send a message to Zone 4 of the
MESSAGE” prompts the caller to start speaking. Say AR2000-Z in Bank 2 and Zone 5 of the AR2000-Z in
your message into the phone. Press [#] and hang up Bank 3, key in the following after recording a mes-
the phone. Your message will be sent to all zones sage: key in [*], [2], [4] and key in [*], [3], [5] and then
connected to the Audio Router Device. The message press the [#] key and hang up. The message will be
can be up to 90 seconds long. If the user exceeds 90 sent to Zone 4 of Bank 2 and Zone 5 of Bank 3.
second duration, the message will not play back. This
is the procedure for selecting “All Call”. For example: To send a message to Zone 6
from Bank 8 after recording a message, key in [*], [8],
C. Abort a Message Without Sending it [6] and then press the [#] key and hang up. The
Anywhere. message will be sent to Zone 6 of Bank 8.
Hang up at any time without pressing [#].
For example: To select Zones 1,3,5 from Bank
2 and Zones 1, 2 from Bank 3, key in the following
D. Send Your Message to a Specific Selected Zone
after recording a message: key in [*], [2 ], [1], [3], [5],
or Zones.
[*], [3], [1], [2], [#] and hang up. The message will be
After saying the message, press any keys on sent to Zones 1, 3 and 5 of Bank 2 and Zones 1 and 2
the telephone keypad from 1-8. These correspond to of Bank 3.
the eight zones which are connected to the master
AR2000-M unit. Pressing [1] will select Zone 1, E. Send Your Message to a Selected Preset.
pressing [5] will select Zone 5 and pressing [8] will
select Zone 8. After recording a message, first key in [0 ],
then the associated Bank number(1-8) and then the
For example: To send a message to only Zone
Preset number of that Bank (1-8). The zero indicates
3 of the AR2000-M, after recording the message key
you are about to select a preset Bank and preset
in [3] and then press the [#] key. The message will be
number. Only one preset may be selected for a
sent only to Zone 3.
message.
For example: To send a message to Zone 3
and Zone 4 of the AR2000-M, after recording the If additional AR2000-P units are connected,
message key in [3], key in [4] and then press the [#] those Presets may also be individually selected. To
key. The message will be sent to Zone 3 and to Zone accomplish this, first key in [0], then key in the Bank
4. number which is associated with the additional
Preset you desire to reference (2 –8) and then key in
If additional AR2000-Z units are connected,
a Preset for that bank. A maximum of seven (7)
those Zones may also be individually selected. To
additional Preset Banks may be added to the
accomplish this first key in [*], then key in the bank
AR2000-M device. The master unit is designated as
number which is associated with the additional zones
Bank 1.
you desire to reference (2 –8) and then key in a Zone
for that bank. A maximum of seven (7) additional
To select preset 2 from Bank 2 after recording
Zone Banks may be added to the AR2000-M device.
a message, key in [0], [2], [2] and then press the [#]
The master unit is designated as Bank 1.
key and hang up. The message will be sent to Preset
For example: Keying in [*], [1], [2] will select 2 of Bank 2.
to send your message to zone 2 of Bank 1 (located in
the master unit). The [*] says you are about to select To select Preset 3 from Bank 8 after record-
a Bank number and Zone. To send the message to ing a message, key in [0], [8], [3] and then press the
Bank 1 Zones 1, 4, and 6, after recording a message [#] key and hang up. The message will be sent to
key in [*], [1], [1], [4], [6], [# ] and hang up. The Preset 3 of Bank 8.
-16-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Telephone operation is essentially independent VI. SERVICE.
of other operations except when the device plays its
recorded message. Whatever modes were active The factory will provide technical assistance
before phone operation will return when the phone with any problem that cannot be handled locally with
message is complete. In the event that the unit is satisfaction. Please call customer service for assis-
stuck in playback mode and needs to be disconnected, tance (708) 534-3400.
press and hold the “All call” button for 1 second to
force a disconnect. Communication and shipments should be
addressed to:
V. MAINTENANCE
Federal Signal Corporation
SAFETY MESSAGE TO MAINTENANCE Electrical Products Division
PERSONNEL Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
Failure to follow all the safety precautions and University Park, Il
instructions may result in property damage, serious 60466-3195
injury, or death to you or others.

• Read and understand all instructions before

performing maintenance on this unit.

• Do not perform maintenance on this unit

when the circuit is energized.

• Periodic checks should be made to ensure that

effectiveness of this device has not been
reduced.

• Any maintenance to this unit MUST be

performed by a trained electrician in accor-
dance with the National Electrical Code
(NFPA 70) or other national or local codes.

• Never alter this unit in any manner. Safety

may be jeopardized if alterations are made to
this device.

• The nameplates, which may contain caution-

ary or other information of importance to
maintenance personnel, should not be ob-
scured by painting or anything of the like.

WARNING

Unauthorized servicing of this unit may

result in diminished performance and/or
property damage, serious injury, or death to
you or others. If a malfunctioning unit is
encountered, do not attempt any field repair
or retro fit of parts. Refer to paragraph VI.
SERVICE for instructions regarding return/
repair of the unit.

-17-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MODELS AMR6-2570 AND AMR6-100
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODELS AMR6-2570
AND AMR6-100 ADJUSTABLE POWER LOUDSPEAKERS

MODELOS AMR6-2570 Y AMR6-100

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN PARA PARLANTES DE
POTENCIA AJUSTABLE MODELOS AMR6-2570 Y AMR6-100

MODÈLES AMR6-2570 ET AMR6-100

INSTRUCTIONS D'INSTALLATION POUR LES MODÈLES
AMR6-2570 ET AMR6-100 DE HAUT-PARLEURS RÉGLABLES

Address all communications and shipments to:

Adressez toutes les communications et expéditions à :
Dirija toda la correspondencia y envíos a:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODELS AMR6-2570 AND AMR6-100
ADJUSTABLE POWER LOUDSPEAKERS

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage,
serious injury, or death to you or others.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS

Peoples lives depend on your safe installation of our products. It is important to follow all
instructions shipped with the products. This device is to be installed by a trained electrician who is
thoroughly familiar with the National Electric Code and will follow the NEC guidelines as well as
local codes.

The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and routing of the wiring is to
be accomplished under the direction of the Facilities Engineer and the Safety Engineer. In addition,
listed below are some other important safety instructions and precautions you should follow:

• This unit should be installed by a qualified electrician in accordance with NFPA 72,
and national and local Electrical and Fire Codes, under the direction of the
authority having jurisdiction.

• If the unit is not installed in a supervisory system, it must be tested at regular

intervals. Refer to NFPA 72 and the local Fire Codes for this information.

• Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this equipment.

• Do not connect this unit to the system when power is on.

• All quality speakers of this size and type are capable of producing loud sounds
which may cause, in certain situations, permanent hearing loss. You should take
appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing protection.

• After installation, test the sound system to ensure proper operation.

• All quality speakers of this size and type are capable of producing loud sounds,
which may cause, in certain situations, permanent hearing loss. The device should
be installed far enough away from potential listeners to limit their exposure while
still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal Regulations 1910.95
Noise Standard provides guidelines, which may be used regarding permissible
noise exposure levels.

• Show these instructions to your Safety Engineer and then file them in a safe place
and refer to them when maintaining and/or reinstalling the unit.

• Establish a procedure to routinely check the sound system for proper activation
and operation.

• Consult the authority having jurisdiction in your area regarding the proper use
and installation of this product.

A. GENERAL.

The Model AMR6-2570 loudspeaker is Underwriters Laboratories Listed for “Fire Protective
Signaling Use” (category designations UUMW, UEAY, and UEAY7) and the Model AMR6-100 is
Listed for “General Signaling Use” (category designations UEAY, and UEAY7). Both loudspeaker
models are UL listed for use in return air ceiling plenum spaces.

The 25/70 volt model includes an in-line capacitor to provide the isolation necessary for
supervisory use. The 25/ 70 volt model is designed to reproduce electronically generated warning
tones that command rapid recognition of emergency alerting signals. In addition, both loudspeaker
models can reproduce tones, full range voice communication and background music.
-1-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 B. POWER ADJUSTMENT.
See figures 1 and 2. Multiple power settings are achieved via selection of transformer tabs. The
unit is set at the factory to the 8-watt position. To adjust the power (volume), remove the receptacle/
wire assembly for power setting and place it on the transformer tab corresponding to the desired
power (see table 1). Ensure that the receptacle is fully seated on the tab.

C. SPECIFICATIONS.
The AMR6-2570 and AMR6-100 are high fidelity 6.5" 2-way speakers, incorporating a 14mm
hard dome, neodymium tweeter.
Frequency response rating 110 Hz - 20,000 Hz
Maximum Supervisory Voltage 100Vdc
UL Audibility Rating See Table 1
Audibility Ratings On Axis
@ 10", 8-watt tap
Model AMR6-2570 81 dBa, 25 volt tap, 85.0 dBa, 70 volt tap
Model AMR6-100 85.0 dBa
Weight 3 pounds
Construction ABS Frame - UL VO, 5VA Flame Class
White Powder Coated Steel Grille
D. INSTALLATION.

To avoid electrical shock, do not attempt to install wires when power is on.

1. Electrical Connections.

FOR SUPERVISED SYSTEMS

An uninsulated section of a single conductor must NOT be looped around a terminal and
used as two separate connections. The wire must be severed to provide electrical
supervision of the connection.

Use 2 x 14-18 AWG wiring for speaker models.

Strip 1/4" of insulation from all wiring leads. Attach the appropriate wires to the correspond-
ing terminals on the back of the speaker as shown in figures 1, 2, and 3. The positive or “+” terminal
is marked with a red screw head. Tighten the screws to ensure that the wires are firmly held in
place.

To select the desired wattage, refer to paragraph B. and see figures 1 and 2. Move the
receptacle-wire assembly to set the desired output level. See table 1.

The 25/70 volt model is factory configured for 70 Vrms operation. For 25 Vrms operation
remove the supplied receptacle/wire assembly and place it on the 25V tab (see figure 1). The 100
volt model is factory configured for 100 volt operation and no user connections are required.

2. Mounting (see figure 4).

Both loudspeaker models are mounted using the R6BB back box and R6TB support bridge.
These loudspeakers can easily be mounted to any surface thickness between 1/4" and 1-1/2" due to
the unique adjustable “L” shaped clamps (see figure 4). Mounting of this product using the Model
R6BB back box and Model R6TB support bridge into a ceiling tile is accomplished as follows:

a. Remove the ceiling tile and cut a hole using the enclosed template or using the Model
R6TB support bridge as a template.

b. Bend up the four horseshoe tabs on the bridge (see figure 4).

c. Replace the tile and push back an adjacent tile.

-2-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 d. Position the support bridge through the adjacent tile opening and secure it over the tile
just cut.
e. Place the back box onto the support bridge ensuring that the four tabs in the bridge
locate into the corresponding slots on the back box (see figure 4).

f. Using pliers, turn the top section of the four tabs 1/8 turn in either direction to secure the
back box to the support bridge.

g. Install the wiring into the back box ensuring that all applicable codes are met.

h. Replace the adjacent tile, connect the wiring to the speaker (see figures 1 and 2), and
secure the speaker using the adjustable “L’ shaped clamps.

E. TESTING/OPERATING.

Under certain conditions these devices are capable of producing sounds loud enough to
cause hearing damage. Adequate hearing protection should be worn if standing within
close proximity to the device while testing. Recommendations in the OSHA Sound Level
Standard (29 CFR 1910) should not be exceeded.
1. After installation is complete, be sure to test the system to verify that each speaker operates
satisfactorily. If it is found that the volume is too low for its location, a higher wattage tap may be
selected. Carefully remove the speaker and move the receptacle to a higher wattage tap (see figures
1 and 2). Reinstall the speaker and retest.

2. After completion of initial system test, establish a program for periodic testing of this device.
Refer to NFPA 72, local Fire Codes and the authority having jurisdiction for
this information.

3. Provide a copy of these instructions for the Safety Engineer, system operator(s) and
maintenance personnel.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO OPERATORS

(Regarding the 25/70 volt model)
Even if your warning system is operating properly, it may not be completely effective.
People may not see, hear or heed your warning signal. You must recognize this fact and
ensure that your warning signal achieves its intended effect through proper testing/
training sequences within your specific application(s), or other appropriate actions.

F. MAINTENANCE.
If cleaning of the front face of this device is required, a mild soap solution is recommended as the
cleaning agent.
NOTE
Although not advised, if painting/touch-up of the grille model’s vinyl face is necessary, a
vinyl-based paint is required for coverage.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions in this document may result in
property damage, serious injury, or death to you or others.
• Read and understand all instructions before performing maintenance on this unit.
• Periodic checks should be made to ensure that effectiveness of this device has not
been reduced because the speaker has become clogged with a foreign substance or
because objects have been placed in front of the speaker.
• Any maintenance to this unit MUST be performed by a trained electrician in
accordance with NEC guidelines and local codes.
• Never alter this unit in any manner.
-3-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Periodically check this device to verify that there are no foreign substances in, or in front of,
the speaker which will reduce its effectiveness.

2. Testing should be periodically performed. Refer to NFPA 72, local Fire Codes and the
authority having jurisdiction for this information.

3. In the event a volume adjustment or other repair is required, be sure to refer to the Safety
Message To Maintenance Personnel before proceeding.

G. SERVICE.

Unauthorized repair/servicing of the unit may result in degradation of performance and/

or property damage, serious injury, or death to you or others. If a malfunctioning unit is
encountered, do not attempt any field repair/retrofit of parts.

Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with any problems
that cannot be handled locally.

Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair, must be accompanied by a
Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A. can be obtained from the local Distributor or
Manufacturer’s Representative.

At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the malfunction, should
be given.

Address all communications and shipments to:

Federal Signal Corporation

Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-4-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN PARA PARLANTES DE POTENCIA
AJUSTABLE MODELOS AMR6-2570 Y AMR6-100

El incumplimiento de todas las instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad puede dar

como resultado daño a la propiedad, lesiones graves o la muerte para usted u otros.

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA LOS INSTALADORES

Las vidas de las personas dependen de que usted instale con seguridad nuestros productos. Es
importante seguir todas las instrucciones que se envían con los productos. Este dispositivo debe
ser instalado por un electricista capacitado que esté totalmente familiarizado con el Código
nacional de electricidad y que cumpla tanto con las normas NEC como con los códigos locales.
La elección del sitio de montaje del dispositivo, sus controles y la ruta del cableado debe
realizarse bajo la dirección del ingeniero de la instalación y del ingeniero de seguridad. Además, a
continuación se detallan otras importantes instrucciones y precauciones sobre la seguridad que
usted debe cumplir:
• Esta unidad debe ser instalada por un electricista calificado de acuerdo con NFPA
72, y con los Códigos locales de electricidad e incendio, bajo la dirección de la
autoridad que tenga jurisdicción.
• Si la unidad no se instala en un sistema de supervisión, debe ser probada a
intervalos regulares. Consulte el NFPA 72 y los Códigos locales sobre incendios
por esta información.
• Lea y entienda todas las instrucciones antes de instalar o de hacer funcionar este
equipo.
• No conecte esta unidad al sistema mientras la corriente está encendida.
• Todos los parlantes de calidad de este tipo y tamaño son capaces de producir
sonidos fuertes que pueden causar, en ciertas situaciones, sordera permanente.
Debe tomar las precauciones adecuadas como por ejemplo usar protección para
los oídos.
• Luego de la instalación, pruebe el sistema de sonido para asegurar un
funcionamiento adecuado.
• Todos los parlantes de calidad de este tipo y tamaño son capaces de producir
sonidos fuertes que pueden causar, en ciertas situaciones, sordera permanente. El
dispositivo debe instalarse lo suficientemente alejado de escuchas potenciales
para limitar su exposición mientras continúa manteniendo su efectividad. El
Código OSHA de regulaciones federales 1910.95 Estándar de ruido proporciona
normas, que pueden usarse con referencia a los niveles permitidos de exposición
al ruido.
• Muestre estas instrucciones a su ingeniero de seguridad y luego guárdelas en un
lugar seguro y remítase a ellas cuando realice el mantenimiento y/o reinstale la
unidad.
• Establezca un procedimiento para revisar rutinariamente la instalación del
sistema de sonido para verificar su activación y funcionamiento adecuado.
• Consulte con la autoridad que tenga jurisdicción en su área con respecto al uso y
la instalación adecuada de este producto.

A. GENERAL.
El altavoz modelo AMR6-2570 está certificado por Underwriters Laboratories para el “Uso en la
señalización de protección contra incendio” (denominación de tipo UUMW, UEAY y UEAY7) y el
modelo AMR6-100 está certificado para “Uso de señalización general” (denominación de tipo UEAY
y UEAY7). Ambos modelos de altavoz están certificados por UL para uso en espacios plenos de
cielorrasos de aire de retorno.

El modelo de 25/70 voltios incluye un condensador en línea para proporcionar el aislamiento

necesario para uso de supervisión. El modelo de 25/70 voltios está diseñado para reproducir
-5-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 tonos de advertencia generados electrónicamente que comandan un reconocimiento rápido de las
señales de alerta de emergencia. Además, ambos modelos de parlantes pueden reproducir tonos,
comunicación de voz de alcance total y música de fondo.

B. AJUSTE DE POTENCIA.

Ver figuras 1 y 2. A través de la selección de las lengüetas del transformador se pueden

obtener múltiples valores de potencia. En la fábrica la unidad se ajusta en la posición de 8 vatios.
Para ajustar la potencia (volumen), quite el ensamblaje del receptáculo/cable para ajustar la
potencia y colóquelos en la lengüeta correspondiente del transformador a la potencia deseada
(ver tabla 1). Asegúrese de que el receptáculo esté totalmente apoyado en la lengüeta.

C. ESPECIFICACIONES.

El AMR6-2570 y el AMR6-100 son parlantes de alta fidelidad de 2 vías de 6,5”, e incorporan

un altavoz de alta frecuencia de neodimio, de domo rígido de 14 mm.

Clasificación de respuesta de frecuencia 110 Hz - 20,000 Hz

Máximo voltaje de supervisión 100VCC
Capacidad de audibilidad UL Vea la Tabla 1
Clasificaciones de audibilidad en
el eje @ 10", derivación de 8 vatios
Modelo AMR6-2570 81 dBa, derivación de 25 volt, 85.0 dBa, derivación de 70 volt
Modelo AMR6-100 85.0 dBa
Peso 3 libras
Estructura Marco ABS - Clase UL “Flame” (llama) 5VA, VO
Rejilla de acero cubierto de polvo blanco
D. INSTALACIÓN.

Para evitar un choque eléctrico, no intente instalar cables cuando está encendido.

1. Conexiones eléctricas.

PARA SISTEMAS SUPERVISADOS

Una sección no aislada de un único conductor NO debe ser enlazada alrededor de un

terminal y utilizada como dos conexiones separadas. El cable debe ser dividido para
proporcionar supervisión eléctrica de la conexión.

Para los modelos de parlantes utilice un cableado de 2 x 12-18 AWG.

Pele 1/4" de aislamiento de todos los conductores del cableado. Conecte loe alambres
apropiados a los terminales correspondientes en la parte posterior del altavoz tal como se muestra
en las figuras 1, 2 y 3. El terminal positivo o “+” está marcado con una cabeza roja de tornillo.
Apriete los tornillos para asegurar que los alambres estén firmemente colocados en su posición.

Para seleccionar la potencia deseada, consulte el párrafo B y vea las figuras 1 y 2. Mueva el
conjunto receptáculo-alambre para fijar el nivel de salida deseado. Vea la tabla 1.

El modelo de 25/70 voltios viene configurado de fábrica para un funcionamiento de 70

Vrms. Para un funcionamiento de 25 Vrms quite el ensamblaje receptáculo/cable que se
proporciona y colóquelo en la pestaña de 25 voltios (vea la figura 2). El modelo de 100 voltios está
configurado de fábrica para funcionar a 100 voltios y no se necesita realizar ninguna conexión por
parte del usuario.

2. Montaje (ver figura 4).

Ambos modelos de parlantes se arman utilizando una caja trasera R6BB y un puente de
soporte R6TB. Estos parlantes pueden ser armados fácilmente sobre una superficie de cualquier
espesor entre 1/4” y 1-1/2” gracias a las exclusivas grapas ajustables en forma de “L” (ver figura
-6-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4). El armado de este producto utilizando la caja trasera modelo R6BB y el puente de apoyo
modelo R6TB en una tablilla del cielorraso se logra de la siguiente forma:

a. Quite la tablilla del cielorraso y corte un orificio utilizando la plantilla que se adjunta o el
puente de apoyo modelo R6TB como plantilla.

b. Doble hacia arriba las cuatro pestañas en herradura del puente (ver figura 4).

c. Vuelva a colocar la tablilla y empuje hacia atrás una tablilla contigua.

d. Coloque el puente de apoyo a través de la abertura de la tablilla contigua y asegúrelo

sobre la tablilla recién cortada.

e. Coloque la caja trasera sobre el puente de apoyo asegurándose de que las cuatro
pestañas del puente queden dentro de las ranuras correspondientes en la caja trasera (ver figura 4).

f. Utilizando pinzas, doble la sección superior de las cuatro pestañas 1/8 de vuelta en
cualquier dirección para asegurar la caja trasera al puente de apoyo.

g. Instale el cableado dentro de la caja trasera asegurándose de que se cumplan todos los
códigos que correspondan.

h. Vuelva a colocar la tablilla adyacente, conecte el cableado al altavoz (vea las figuras 1 y 2) y
asegure que el altavoz esté usando las grapas ajustables en forma de “L”.

E. PRUEBA/FUNCIONAMIENTO

Bajo ciertas condiciones estos dispositivos pueden producir sonidos lo suficientemente

altos para causar daños al oído. Debe usar una protección adecuada para el oído si va a
estar en las cercanías al dispositivo durante la prueba. No deben excederse las
recomendaciones de la norma de nivel de sonido OSHA (29 CFR 1910).

1. Después de que la instalación esté completa, asegúrese de probar el sistema para verificar que
ambos altavoces funcionen satisfactoriamente. Si encuentra que el volumen es demasiado bajo para
su ubicación, puede seleccionar una toma de mayor potencia. Retire cuidadosamente el altavoz y
mueva el receptáculo a una toma de mayor potencia (vea las figuras 1 y 2). Instale nuevamente el
altavoz y pruebe de nuevo.

2. Después de completar la prueba inicial del sistema, establezca un programa para pruebas
periódicas de este dispositivo. Remítase al NFPA 72, a los Códigos locales sobre incendios y a la
autoridad que tenga jurisdicción para obtener esta información.

3. Proporciónele una copia de estas instrucciones al Ingeniero de seguridad, a el/los

operador(es) del sistema y al personal de mantenimiento.

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA LOS OPERADORES

(Con respecto al modelo de 25/70 voltios)

Incluso si su sistema de advertencia está funcionando adecuadamente, es posible que no

sea completamente efectivo. Las personas pueden no ver, oír o hacer caso de su señal de
advertencia. Debe reconocer este hecho y asegurarse de que su señal de advertencia
logre los efectos pretendidos a través de secuencias adecuadas de pruebas/capacitación
dentro de su(s) aplicación(es) específicas, o por medio de otras acciones adecuadas.

F. MANTENIMIENTO.

Si se necesita limpiar la cara frontal de este dispositivo, se recomienda usar una solución
jabonosa suave como agente de limpieza.

-7-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTA

Aunque no se recomienda, si es necesario pintar/retocar la cara de vinilo del modelo de

rejilla, se debe utilizar una pintura vinílica para su cobertura.

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA EL PERSONAL DE MANTENIMIENTO

El incumplimiento de todas las instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad en este documento

puede dar como resultado daño a la propiedad, lesiones graves o la muerte para usted u otros.

• Lea y comprenda todas las instrucciones antes de efectuar el mantenimiento en

esta unidad.

• Deben realizarse revisiones periódicas para asegurar que no se haya reducido la

efectividad de este dispositivo debido a que el altavoz se haya obstruido con alguna
sustancia extraña o porque se haya colocado objetos frente al altavoz.

• Todo el mantenimiento que se le realice a esta unidad DEBE ser llevado a cabo
por un electricista capacitado de acuerdo con las normas NEC y los códigos lo-
cales.

• Nunca altere esta unidad en forma alguna.

1. Revise periódicamente este dispositivo para verificar que no existen sustancias extrañas
dentro ni frente al parlante que puedan reducir su efectividad.

2. Se deben realizar pruebas periódicamente. Remítase al NFPA 72, a los Códigos locales
sobre incendios y a la autoridad que tenga jurisdicción para obtener esta información.

3. En el caso de que se requiera un ajuste de volumen u otra reparación, asegúrese de

consultar el Mensaje de seguridad para el personal de mantenimiento antes de proceder.

G. SERVICIO.

La reparación/servicio no autorizado de la unidad puede dar como resultado el

deterioro del rendimiento y/o daño a la propiedad, lesiones serias o la muerte para
usted u otros. Si se encuentra un malfuncionamiento en la unidad, no intente ningún
tipo de reparación/adaptación de las piezas en el lugar.

Federal Signal llevará a cabo el servicio de su equipo o le proporcionará asistencia técnica con
cualquier problema que no pueda ser manejado en forma local.

Cualquier unidad devuelta a Federal Signal para realizar un servicio, inspección o reparación
debe estar acompañada por una Autorización de devolución de material (R.M.A.). Esta R.M.A. se
puede obtener a través del Distribuidor local o del Representante del fabricante.

En este momento se deberá brindar una breve explicación del servicio solicitado o de la
naturaleza del malfuncionamiento.

Dirija todas las comunicaciones y envíos a:

Federal Signal Corporation

Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-8-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION POUR LES MODÈLES AMR6-2570 ET AMR6-100
DE HAUT-PARLEURS ÉLECTRIQUES RÉGLABLES

Le non-respect de toutes les précautions de sécurité et instructions peuvent mener à des dommages
à la propriété, des blessures graves ou la mort pour vous ou pour d’autres.

MESSAGE DE SÉCURITÉ POUR LES INSTALLATEURS

La vie des gens dépend de votre installation sécuritaire de nos produits. Il est important de suivre
toutes les Instructions expédiées avec ces produits. Ce dispositif doit être installé par un électricien
bien formé qui connaît le Code national de l’électricité et qui respecte toutes les directives du NEC
ainsi que les codes locaux.

Le choix de l’emplacement de montage de ce dispositif, ses contrôles et l’acheminement du

câblage doit se faire sous la direction de l’ingénieur de l’installation et l’ingénieur responsable de la
sécurité. En outre, vous trouverez ci-après une liste de certaines instructions et précautions de
sécurité importantes à suivre :
• Cet appareil doit être installé par un électricien qualifié conformément à la norme
NFPA 72, et les codes nationaux et locaux de l’électricité et des incendies, sous la
direction de l’autorité responsable.
• Si l’appareil n’est pas installé dans un système de surveillance, il doit être testé à
intervalles réguliers. Reportez-vous à la norme NFPA 72 et aux codes d’incendie
locaux pour cette information.
• Lisez et comprenez bien toutes les instructions avant d’installer ou de faire
fonctionner cet équipement.
• Ne connectez pas cet appareil au système lorsque ce dernier est sous tension.

• Tous les haut-parleurs de qualité de cette taille et de ce type peuvent produire des
sons forts qui pourraient provoquer, dans certaines situations, une perte auditive
permanente. Prenez les précautions voulues comme par exemple, portez une
protection auditive.

• Après l’installation, testez le système pour vous assurer qu’Il fonctionne

correctement.

• Tous les haut-parleurs de qualité de cette taille et de ce type peuvent produire des
sons forts qui pourraient provoquer, dans certaines situations, une perte auditive
permanente. L’appareil devrait être installé assez loin des auditeurs pour limiter
leur exposition tout en conservant l’efficacité de l’appareil. Le code OSHA des
règlements fédéraux sous la norme de bruit 1910.95 offre des indications qui
pourraient servir concernant les niveaux d’intensité de bruits permissibles.

• Montrez ces instructions à votre ingénieur responsable de la sécurité, puis rangez-

les dans un endroit sûr et reportez-vous à ces instructions pour l’entretien et/ou la
réinstallation de l’appareil.

• Établissez une procédure de vérification de routine du système de son pour assurer

une bonne activation et opération.

• Consultez l’autorité responsable dans votre région quant à la bonne utilisation et

installation de ce produit.

A. GÉNÉRALITÉS.
Le haut-parleur Modèle AMR6-2570 est listé dans Underwriters Laboratories sous «Utilisation
de Signal de Protection contre l’Incendie» (désignations de catégorie UUMW, UEAY, et UEAY7) et le
Modèle AMR6-100 est listé sous “Utilisation de Signal Générale» (désignations de catégorie UEAY,
et UEAY7). Les deux modèles de haut-parleur sont listés sous UL pour utilisation dans des espaces
plénum de plafond d’air de retour.

-9-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Le modèle de 25/70 volts inclut un condensateur en ligne pour fournir l’isolation nécessaire aux
fins de supervision. Le modèle de 25/ 70 volts est conçu pour reproduire les signaux d’avertissement
électronique qui commandent les signaux de reconnaissance rapide d’urgence. En plus, les deux
modèles de haut-parleurs peuvent reproduire des tonalités, la gamme complète de la communica-
tion vocale et la musique de fond.

B. AJUSTEMENT DE COURANT.
Voir les figures 1 et 2. Vous pouvez obtenir des réglages multiples de courant par sélection des
leviers de transformateur. L’appareil est réglé en usine en position de 8 watts. Pour ajuster le
courant (volume), retirez le montage prise/fil pour régler le courant et placez-le sur le levier du
transformateur correspondant au courant voulu (voir le tableau 1). Assurez-vous que la prise soit
bien installée sur le levier.

C. SPÉCIFICATIONS.
Les modèles AMR6-2570 et AMR6-100 sont des haut-parleurs haute fidélité de 6,5 po /16,4 cm à
2 voies incorporant un globe dur de 14 mm, haut-parleur d’aigus de néodyme.
Capacité en fréquence de réponse 110 Hz - 20,000 Hz
Tension de Supervision Maximum 100V CC
Valeur nominale d’Audibilité UL Voir le Tableau 1
Capacités d’audibilité sur axe
@ 10 po/25,4 cm, dérivation 8 watts
Modèle AMR6-2570 81 dBa, dérivation 25 volts, 85.0 dBa, dérivation 70 volts
Modèle AMR6-100 85.0 dBa
Poids 3 livres/1,361 kg
Construction Enceinte d’ABS - UL VO, catégorie d’incendie 5VA
Grille d’acier revêtue de poudre blanche
D. INSTALLATION.

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, n’essayez pas d’installer les fils lorsque l’appareil est
sous tension.

1. Connexions électriques.

POUR LES SYSTÈMES SUPERVISÉS

Il NE faut PAS enrouler une section non-isolée d’un monoconducteur autour d’une borne
et cela ne doit pas servir comme deux connexions distinctes. Le fil doit être coupé pour
fournir la supervision électrique de la connexion.

Utilisez 2 fils 12-18 AWG pour les modèles à haut-parleurs.

Enlever 1/4" d’isolation de tous les fils conducteurs. Fixer les câbles appropriés aux bornes
correspondantes à l’arrière du haut-parleur comme représenté dans les Figures 1, 2, et 3. La borne
positive ou «+» est marquée par une tête de vis rouge. Serrer les vis pour s’assurer que les câbles
sont correctement mis en place.

Pour sélectionner la consommation en watt, se référer au paragraphe B, et voir les Figures 1

et 2. Déplacer l’ensemble prise-câble pour régler le niveau de puissance voulu. Voir le Tableau 1.

Le modèle de 25/70 volts est configuré en usine pour une opération à 70 de tension rms. Pour un
fonctionnement à 25 de tension rms, retirez l’assemblage fil/prise fourni et placez-le à l’attache de
25V (voir la figure 2). Le modèle de 100 volts est configuré pour un fonctionnement à 100 volts et
aucun besoin de connexions d’utilisateur.

2. Montage (voir la figure 4).

Les deux modèles de haut-parleurs sont installés en utilisant la boîte de fond R6BB et le
pont d’appui R6TB. Ces haut-parleurs s’installent facilement sur toute surface d’une épaisseur
entre 1/4 po/0,635 cm et 1-1/2 po/4 cm à cause des pinces uniques réglables en forme de “L” (voir la

-10-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 figure 4). Voici comment monter ce produit en utilisant la boîte de fond de modèle R6BB et le pont
d’appui de modèle R6TB dans un carreau du plafond :

a. Retirez le carreau de plafond et coupez un trou avec le gabarit fourni ou en utilisant le

pont d’appui de modèle R6TB comme gabarit.

b. Repliez vers le haut les quatre attaches en fer à cheval sur le pont (voir la figure 4).

c. Replacez le carreau et repoussez un carreau adjacent.

d. Positionnez le pont d’appui par l’ouverture du carreau adjacent et fixez-le sur le carreau
que vous venez de couper.

e. Placez la boîte arrière sur le pont d’appui en vous assurant que les quatre attaches sur le
pont se trouvent dans les fentes correspondantes sur la boîte arrière (voir la figure 4).

f. Utilisez des pinces, tournez la section supérieure des quatre attaches 1/8 de tour dans
l’une ou l’autre direction pour fixer la boîte arrière au pont d’appui.

g. Installez le câblage dans la boîte arrière en vous assurant de respecter tous les codes
applicables.

h. Remettre en place le carreau adjacent, connecter les câbles au haut-parleur (voir les
Figures 1 et 2), et fixer le haut-parleur au moyen des attaches en forme de «L» réglables.

E. TEST/FONCTIONNEMENT.

Dans certaines conditions, ces appareils peuvent émettre des sons suffisamment puis-
sants pour causer un endommagement de l’ouïe. Une protection de l’ouïe adéquate doit
être portée si l’on se trouve très près de l’appareil pendant les essais. Les Recommanda-
tions de la Norme de Niveau de Son OSHA (29 CFR 1910) ne doivent pas être dépas-
sées.

1. Après l’installation, veiller à tester le système pour vérifier que chaque haut-parleur fonc-
tionne de m anière satisfaisante. Si il est constaté que le volume est trop bas pour l’emplacement,
un niveau de watts plus élevé peut être sélectionné. Enlever le haut-parleur avec précautions et
connecter la prise à une fiche de source de watts plus élevée (voir les Figures 1 et 2). Réinstaller le
haut-parleur et retester.

2. Après avoir terminé le test initial du système établissez un programme de test à intervalles
réguliers pour cet appareil. Reportez-vous à la norme NFPA 72, les codes d’incendie locaux et
l’autorité ayant juridiction pour cette information.

3. Fournissez une copie de ces instructions à l’ingénieur responsable de la sécurité, l’opérateur

du système et le personnel responsable de l’entretien.

MESSAGE DE SÉCURITÉ POUR LES OPÉRATEURS

(concernant le modèle de 25/70 volts)

Même si votre système d’alarme fonctionne correctement, Il n’est peut-être pas

entièrement efficace. Les gens peuvent ne pas voir, entendre ou respecter votre signal
d’alarme. Vous devez reconnaître ce fait et faire en sorte que votre signal d’alarme
atteigne le but recherché en testant correctement et en établissant de bonnes séquences
au sein de votre ou vos applications précises ou par toutes autres mesures.

F. ENTRETIEN.

S’il faut nettoyer l’avant de l’appareil, il est recommandé d’utiliser une solution savonneuse
comme agent de nettoyage.

-11-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE

Bien que cela ne soit pas recommandé, utilisez une peinture de vinyle s’il faut peindre ou
retoucher la face de vinyle des modèles à grille.

MESSAGE DE SÉCURITÉ POUR LE PERSONNEL DE L’ENTRETIEN

Le non-respect de toutes les précautions de sécurité et instructions dans ce document peuvent

mener à des dommages à la propriété, des blessures graves ou la mort pour vous ou pour d’autres.
• Lisez et comprenez bien toutes les instructions avant d’effectuer tout entretien de
cet appareil.
• Des vérifications périodiques doivent être faites pour s’assurer que les perfor-
mances de cet appareil n’ont pas été réduites du fait que le haut-parleur a été
bouché par des corps étrangers ou que des objets ont été placés devant le haut-
parleur.
• Tout entretien de cet appareil DOIT être effectué par un électricien formé
conformément aux directives du NEC et des codes locaux.
• Ne modifiez jamais cet appareil de quelque façon que ce soit.

1. Vérifiez périodiquement cet appareil pour vous assurer qu’il n’y ait aucune matière
étrangère à l’intérieur, devant, le haut-parleur qui pourrait réduire son efficacité.

2. Les tests devraient être effectués périodiquement. Reportez-vous à la norme NFPA 72, aux
codes d’incendie locaux et à l’autorité responsable pour cette information.

3. S’il faut un ajustement de volume ou une autre réparation, assurez-vous de vous reporter au
message de sécurité pour le personnel de l’entretien avant de poursuivre.

G. RÉPARATION.

Toute réparation ou tout entretien non autorisé de l’appareil peut mener à une
dégradation de la performance et/ou des dommages à la propriété, de graves blessures,
ou la mort pour vous ou pour d’autres. Si l’appareil fonctionne mal, n’essayez pas de
réparer ou de modifier les pièces sur le terrain.

Federal Signal réparera votre équipement ou fournira une aide technique pour tout problème
qui ne peut être solutionné localement.

Tous les appareils retournés à Federal Signal pour réparation, inspection ou entretien doivent
être accompagnés d’une autorisation de retour du matériel. Cette autorisation s’obtient du
distributeur local ou du représentant du fabricant.

Il faudrait aussi joindre une brève explication du service demandé ou la nature de la défaillance.

Adressez toutes les communications et les expéditions à :

Federal Signal Corporation

Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-12-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1 A

B
C

- + E
290A4792

English Español
A. 25/70 Volt Model A. Modelo de 25/70 voltios
B. Primary B. Primario
C. Secondary C. Secundario
D. Red D. Rojo
E. Field Wiring Terminals (For Connection E. Terminales de cableado de campo (para conexión
to 14-22 AWG conductors) a conductores de 14-22 AWG)

Note: An uninsulated section of a single conductor Nota: Una sección no aislada de un único conductor
must NOT be looped around the terminal screw and NO debe ser enlazada alrededor del tornillo termi-
used as two separate connections. The wire must be nal ni ser usada como dos conexiones diferentes. El
severed to provide electrical supervision of the field alambre debe dividirse para proporcionar
wiring connections. supervisión eléctrica de las conexiones del cableado
de campo.

Français
A. Modèle 25/70 Volts
B. Primaire
C. Secondaire
D. Rouge
E. Bornes de Câblage de Champ (Pour Connexion
aux conducteurs 14-22 AWG)

Remarque : Une section non isolée d’un conducteur

simple ne doit PAS être enroulée autour de la vis de la
borne et utilisée comme deux connexions séparées. Le
câble doit être détaché pour assurer la supervision
électrique des connexions de câblage de champ.

-13-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2 A

B
C

- + E
290A4793

English Español
A. 100 Volt Model A. Modelo de 100 voltios
B. Primary B. Primario
C. Secondary C. Secundario
D. Red D. Rojo
E. Field Wiring Terminals (For Connection E. Terminales de cableado de campo (para
to 14-22 AWG conductors) conexión a conductores de 14-22 AWG)

Note: An uninsulated section of a single conductor Nota: Una sección no aislada de un único conduc-
must NOT be looped around the terminal screw tor NO debe ser enlazada alrededor del tornillo
and used as two separate connections. The wire terminal ni ser usada como dos conexiones
must be severed to provide electrical supervision of diferentes. El alambre debe dividirse para
the field wiring connections. proporcionar supervisión eléctrica de las
conexiones del cableado de campo.

Français
A. Modèle 100 Volts
B. Primaire
C. Secondaire
D. Rouge
E. Bornes de Câblage de Champ (Pour Connexion
aux conducteurs 14-22 AWG)

Remarque : Une section non isolée d’un conduc-

teur simple ne doit PAS être enroulée autour de la
vis de la borne et utilisée comme deux connexions
séparées. Le câble doit être détaché pour assurer la
supervision électrique des connexions de câblage
de champ.

-14-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A
3 A

- B C B C

G H E
F
+ D D
C
C

290A4184

English Español
A. Speaker Ground A. Tierra del parlante
B. COM B. COM
C. IN/OUT C. ENTRADA/SALIDA
D. Input (+) D. Entrada (+)
E. EOL Device to be supplied by Listed E. Dispositivo EOL a ser suministrado por
Fire Alarm Control Panel Manufacturer. el Fabricante del panel de control de
F. Speaker 25 or 70 VRMS Signal Source alarma de incendio listado.
G. First Speaker F. Fuente de la señal del parlante de 25 ó
H. Last Speaker 70 VRMS
G. Primer parlante
H. Último parlante
Français
A. Mise à la terre du haut-parleur
B. COM
C. IN/OUT
D. Entrée (+)
E. Dispositif EOL à fournir par le fabricant
du panneau de contrôle de l’alarme
d’incendie homologué.
F. Haut-parleur de 25 ou 70 de tension RMS
source du signal
G. Premier haut-parleur
H. Dernier haut-parleur

Table 1
UL Sound Level @ 10' dBa
Tap 25 Volt 70 Volt
1 Watt 71 73
2 Watt 73 75
4 Watt 74 78
8 Watt 76 81

Tableau 1
Niveau de son UL @ 10' dBa
Dérivation 25 Volts 70 Volts
1 Watt 71 73
2 Watts 73 75
4 Watts 74 78
8 Watts 76 81

Tabla 1
Nivel de sonido UL @ 10' dBa
Derivación 25 Voltios 70 Voltios
1 Vatio 71 73
2 Vatios 73 75
4 Vatios 74 78
8 Vatios 76 81

-15-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4

290A4185B

English Español Français

A. Horseshoe Tabs A. Pestañas de herradura A. Fiches en fer à cheval
B. R6BB Back Box B. Caja posterior R6BB B. Boîte Arrière R6BB
C. R6TB Support Bridge C. Puente de soporte R6TB C. Pont de Support R6TB
D. Ceiling Tile D. Tablilla del cielorraso D. Carreau de Plafond
E. AMR6 Speaker E. Altavoz AMR6 E. Haut-parleur AMR6

-16-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2561704C
REV. C Printed 10/03
Printed in U.S.A.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MODELS AM15 and AM15XD2
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL AM15 AND AM15XD2
AUDIOMASTER® SPEAKER

MODELOS AM15 y AM15XD2

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACION PARA LOS PARLANTE
MODELOS AM15 Y AM15XD2 AUDIOMASTER®

MODELES AM15 et AM15XD2

INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION POUR LE HAUT-PARLEUR
AUDIOMASTER® MODELES AM15 ET AM15XD2

Address all communications and shipments to:

Dirija todas la correspondencia y envíos a:
Adressez toutes les communiations et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL AM15 AND AM15XD2
AUDIOMASTER® SPEAKER

WARNING
Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage,
serious injury, or death to you or others.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS

Peoples lives depend on your safe installation of our products. It is important to follow all
instructions shipped with the products. This device is to be installed by a trained electrician who is
thoroughly familiar with the National Electric Code and will follow the NEC guidelines as well as
local codes.
The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and routing of the wiring is to be
accomplished under the direction of the Facilities Engineer and the Safety Engineer. In addition,
listed below are some other important safety instructions and precautions you should follow:
• Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this equipment.
• This unit must be installed by a qualified electrician in accordance with NFPA 72, and National
and local Electrical and Fire Codes, under the direction of the authority having jurisdiction.
• Do not connect this unit to the system when power is on.
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may cause , in certain situations,
permanent hearing loss. You should take appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing
protection.
• After installation, test the sound system to ensure proper operation.
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may cause, in certain situations,
permanent hearing loss. The device should be installed far enough away from potential listeners
to limit their exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal
Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines which may be used regarding permis-
sible noise exposure levels.
• Show these instructions to your Safety Engineer and then file them in a safe place and refer to
them when maintaining and/or reinstalling the unit.
• After installation and completion of initial system test, a program of periodic testing of this device
must be established. Refer to NFPA 72G, local Fire Codes and the authority having jurisdiction
for this information.
• Consult the authority having jurisdiction in your area regarding the proper use and installation of
this product.

I. GENERAL.
The AudioMaster Model AM15 and AM15XD2 are indoor/outdoor rated, 15 watt power output (8
ohm) loudspeakers for use with general signaling systems such as Federal Signal’s FS.COMMS™
or SelectFone® systems. They are designed to reproduce full range voice communication. They
are suitable for use in areas with high ambient noise levels. The speaker projector is adjustable
and may be repositioned to obtain desired sound distribution.
The AM15XD2 is suitable for use in Class I, Groups A, B, C, & D, Division 2, and Class II,
Groups F & G, Division 2 classified and Class III hazardous locations.

II. SPECIFICATIONS.
Operating Voltage 11 Vrms max
Power Input (selectable) 15 W max
Weight (approx.) 5 lb. (2.25kg)
Impedance 8-ohm
-1-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Size 12-5/8" (320mm) high, 8-1/8" (206mm) wide,
8-1/4" (209mm) deep.
Construction Aluminum enclosure painted with grey enamel.
Amplifier housing sealed with neoprene rubber gasket.

III. INSTALLATION.

A. Unpacking.
After unpacking the speaker, examine it carefully for possible damage that may have occurred
in transit. If equipment has been damaged, immediately file a claim with the carrier stating
extent of damage. Carefully check all shipping labels and tags for special instructions before
removing or destroying them.

B. Mounting Arrangements (See figure 1).

CAUTION
To maintain the hazardous location rating of the Model AM15XD2, do not use the 7/8" knockout
(concealed conduit mounting).
The speaker can be mounted on any relatively flat surface. Conduit connection can be made to
1/2" threaded opening at bottom of housing or, in the case of the AM15, to 7/8" knockout
in rear of housing. After the mounting location and mounting method have been selected,
proceed with the applicable instructions below.
WARNING
Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if an accumulation of water, snow, dust, etc.
resides in the speaker projector, severely reducing or preventing operation of this device.
Mount the unit so speaker projector is pointed horizontally or slightly downward.

1. Flat Surface Mounting.

a. Remove and retain the two screws that secure cover to housing. Remove the cover.
WARNING
Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if any objects are in front of speaker,
severely reducing optimum sound distribution. For maximum effectiveness, ensure that the front
of the speaker is clear of obstructions.
b. Select the mounting location and place rear of housing against mounting surface.
c. Using the mounting holes (two (2) inside the Model AM15’s housing or four (4) in the
AM15XD2’s external mounting bracket) as a template, scribe drill position marks on the
mounting surface. See figure 1 for mounting hole locations and dimensions.
CAUTION
Before drilling holes in any surface, ensure that both sides of surface are clear of items
that could be damaged.
d. Secure the unit to the mounting surface with #10 screws appropriate for the type of
mounting surface material.

-2-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WARNING
Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the projector is mishandled during
installation or over time. DO NOT rotate the projector more than 180 degrees or
internal speaker wiring may be damaged.

e. Reposition speaker projector if necessary to obtain desired sound coverage.

Loosen collar nut (see figure 1) and move projector to desired position.
f. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph III.C. Electrical Connections below
and make the necessary electrical connections.
2. Model AM15 Concealed Conduit Mounting.
a. Remove and retain the two screws that secure cover to housing. Remove the cover.
b. Remove the 7/8" knockout at rear of housing.
c. Install the conduit connection.
NOTE
If installation on an existing electrical box is desired, an optional Model CC adapter
plate is required.
d. Select the mounting location and place rear of housing against mounting surface.
e. Using the two (2) mounting holes as a template, scribe drill position marks on the
mounting surface. See figure 1 for mounting hole locations and dimensions.
CAUTION
Before drilling holes in any surface, ensure that both sides of surface are clear of items
that could be damaged.
f. Secure the unit to the mounting surface with #10 screws appropriate for the type of
mounting surface material.
WARNING
Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the projector is mishandled during
installation or over time. DO NOT rotate the projector more than 180 degrees or
internal speaker wiring may be damaged.

g. Reposition speaker projector if necessary to obtain desired sound coverage.

Loosen collar nut (see figure 1) and move projector to desired position.
h. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph III.C. Electrical Connections below
and make the necessary electrical connections.

C. Electrical Connections.
DANGER
To avoid electrical shock, do not connect wires when circuits are energized.
NOTE
Audio wires should be sized properly by your licensed installation electrician for your service
application. This cable requires a twisted shielded pair with an 18AWG mimum and should
produce no more than 15% signal loss over the length of the cable run.

National Electrical Code as well as local codes must be adhered to in installation of these
models. All electrical wiring must be routed through approved conduit and fittings. The use of
metal conduit and fittings is required to provide grounding of the enclosure.
1. See figures 2 and 3. Connect the audio common (-) leads to the speaker’s common terminal
and audio positive (+) leads to (+) (SIG) terminal.

-3-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WARNING
Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the housing is not closed properly.
To reduce the possibility of explosion, the Model AM15XD2’s housing cover must
be kept tight while circuits are energized.

2. Be sure the neoprene rubber cover gasket is properly seated in the housing groove and
reinstall housing cover.

IV. TESTING/OPERATING.
WARNING
Under certain conditions these devices are capable of producing sounds loud enough to cause
hearing damage. Adequate hearing protection should be worn if standing within close proximity
to device while testing. Recommendations in the OSHA Sound Level Standard
(29 CFR 1910) should not be exceeded.

A. After installation is complete, be sure to test the system to verify that each speaker operates
satisfactorily. If it is found that the unit is too loud for its location, adjust speaker volume level
at the source.
WARNING
Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the housing is not closed properly.
To reduce the possibility of explosion, the Model AM15XD2’s housing cover must
be kept tight while circuits are energized.
B. After completion of initial system test, establish a program for periodic testing of this device.
C. Provide a copy of these instructions for the Safety Engineer, system operator(s) and
maintenance personnel.
SAFETY MESSAGE TO OPERATORS
Even if your warning system is operating properly, it may not be completely effective.
People may not hear or heed your warning signal. You must recognize this fact and ensure that
your warning signal achieves its intended effect through proper test/training sequences within
your specific application(s).

V. MAINTENANCE.
SAFETY MESSAGE TO MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL
Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage, serious
injury, or death to you or others.
• Read and understand all instructions before performing maintenance on this unit.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, or ignition of hazardous atmospheres, do not perform
maintenance or service on this unit when circuits are energized.
• Periodic checks should be made to ensure that effectiveness of this device has not been reduced
because speaker has become clogged with a foreign substance or because objects have been
placed in front of the speaker.
• Any maintenance to this unit MUST be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with
NEC guidelines and local codes.
• Never alter this unit in any manner. Safety in hazardous locations may be jeopardized if additional
openings or alterations are made to Model AM15XD2.
• The nameplates, which contain cautionary or other information of importance to maintenance
personnel, should not be obscured if exterior of device is painted.

-4-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A. Periodically check this device to verify that there are no foreign substances in, or in front of,
the speaker which will reduce its effectiveness.
B. Testing should be periodically performed. Refer to NFPA 72G, local Fire Codes and the
authority having jurisdiction for information.
C. In the event a volume adjustment or other repair is required, be sure to refer to the Safety
Message For Maintenance Personnel before proceeding.

VI. SERVICE.
WARNING
Unauthorized repair/servicing of the unit may result in degradation of performance and/or property
damage, serious injury, or death to you or others. If a malfunctioning unit is encountered,
do not attempt any field repair/retrofit of parts.
Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with any problems that
cannot be handled locally.
Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair, must be accompanied by a
Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A. can be obtained from the local Distributor or
Manufacturer’s Representative.
At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the malfunction, should
be given.
Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-5-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACION PARA LOS PARLANTE
MODELOS AM15 Y AM15XD2 AUDIOMASTER®

PRECAUCION
El no seguir todas las instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad puede acarrear daños a la propiedad,
heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros.
MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD A LOS INSTALADORES
La vida de personas depende de la instalación segura de nuestros productos. Es importante seguir
todas las instrucciones empacadas con los productos. Este dispositivo lo debe instalar un electricista
calificado que esté familiarizado con el Código Nacional Eléctrico y siga las normas así como los
códigos locales.
La selección del sitio de montaje del dispositivo, sus controles y la ruta del alambrado, se hará bajo
la dirección del Ingeniero de las facilidades y del Ingeniero de seguridad. Sin embargo, a
continuación se listan algunas otras instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad que se deben seguir:
• Lea y comprenda todas las instrucciones antes de instalar u operar este equipo.
• Esta unidad debe ser instalada por un electricista calificado de acuerdo con el NFPA 72 y los
códigos eléctricos y de incendio Nacionales y locales, bajo la dirección de la autoridad
competente.
• No conecte esta unidad al sistema si está encendido.
• Todos los parlantes efectivos de prevención producen sonidos fuertes, que pueden causar en
ciertas ocasiones, pérdida permanente del oído y se deben tomar las debidas precauciones tales
como usar protectores auditivos.
• Después de instalado, asegúrese de que el sistema de sonido ofrece una operación apropiada.
• Todos los parlantes efectivos de prevención producen sonidos tan fuertes que pueden causar
pérdida permanente del oído. El aparato debe ser instalado lo bastante lejos de los oyentes
potenciales para limitar su exposición mientras mantenga su efectividad. El código OSHA
1910.95 (EEUU) de regulación Federal del ruido, da las guías que deben usarse para los niveles
de exposición permisible al ruido.
• Enseñe estas instrucciones a su Ingeniero de Seguridad y después archívelas en un lugar seguro y
consúltelas cuando le haga mantenimiento o reinstale la unidad.
• Después de la instalación y prueba inicial del sistema, programe pruebas periódicas de este
aparato. Diríjase al NFPA 72G, los Códigos locales de incendio y la autoridad competente para
obtener esta información.
• Consulte con la autoridad competente en su área, lo correspondiente al correcto uso e instalación
de este producto.

I. GENERAL.
Los modelos AM15 y AM15XD2 de AudioMaster están clasificados para uso externo/interno.
Tienen parlantes de 15 vatios de potencia de salida (8 ohmios) para utilizar con los sistemas de
señalización generales como los sistemas SelectFone© o FS.COMMS™ de Federal Signal. Éstos
están diseñados para reproducir comunicación de voz de alcance completo. Son adecuados para
utilizar en áreas con niveles altos de ruido ambiental. El proyector del parlante se ajusta y se
puede cambiar de posición para obtener la distribución de sonido deseada.
El AM15XD2 es adecuado para utilizar en sitios Clase 1, Grupos A, B, C, y D, División 2, Clase
II, Grupos F y G, División 2 clasificados y Clase III peligrosos.

II. ESPECIFICACIONES.
Voltaje de funcionamiento 11 voltios eficaces máx.
Potencia máxima aplicable 15 vatios máx.
Peso (aproximado) 5 libras (2,25 kg)
-6-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Impedancia 8 ohmios
Tamaño 302mm (alto), 206mm (ancho), 209mm (largo)
Construcción Caja en aluminio pintada con esmalte gris.
Caja del amplificador sellada con un empaque
de neopreno.

III. INSTALACION.

A. Desempaque.
Después de desempacar la unidad, examine cuidadosamente si hay daños de transporte.
Si hubo daños, haga de inmediato un reclamo al transportador, estableciendo el monto del
daño. Revise cuidadosamente todos los sellos de embarque y marquillas por instrucciones
especiales antes de removerlos o destruirlos.

B. Arreglos de montaje (Ver figura 1).

PREVENCION
Para mantener la clasificación de seguridad en áreas peligrosas del Modelo AM15XD2,
no use el disco removible de 7/8" (montaje en conduit embebido).
El parlante puede ser montado en una superficie relativamente plana. Las conexiones de
conduit pueden ser de rosca de 1/2" con entrada en la parte baja de la caja. También el Modelo
AM15 puede ser montado por un disco removible al fondo de la caja. Después de que la
localización de montaje y el método de montaje ha sido seleccionado, proceda con las
instrucciones que se listan a continuación.
PRECAUCION
Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias o la muerte podrían ocurrir si se presenta una acumulación de
agua, nieve , polvo, etc en el parlante, lo que reduce severamente o evita la operación del dispositivo.
Manatenga el parlante en posición horizontal o con una ligera inclinación hacia abajo.

1. Montaje en Superficie Plana.

a. Afloje los 2 tornillos que aseguran la tapa de la caja. Retire la tapa.
PRECAUCION
Daños a la propiedad, heridos graves o incluso su muerte o la de otros puede ocurrir si cualquier
objeto está en frente del parlante, reduciendo severamente la distribución óptima del sonido.
Para mayor efectividad, asegúrese de que el frente del parlante esté
despejado de cualquier obstáculo.

b. Seleccione la localización de montaje y coloque la parte posterior de la caja contra la

superficie de montaje.
c. Usando los huecos de montaje (dos dentro de la caja del Modelo AM15 o 4 en el soporte
de montaje del Modelo AM15XD2) como una plantilla, marque los puntos a perforar en
la superficie de montaje. Vea la figura 1 para localización y dimensión de los huecos de
montaje.
PREVENCION
Antes de perforar los huecos en cualquier superficie, asegúrese de que ambos lados de la superficie
están despejados de cualquier cosa que puede dañarse.

-7-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 d. Asegure la unidad a la superficie de montaje con tornillos #10 apropiados para el tipo de
material de la superficie de montaje.
PRECAUCION
Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso la muerte pueden ocurrir si el parlante es mal
manejado durante la instalación o con el tiempo. NO rote el parlante más de
180º o el cableado interno del parlante sufrirá daños.

e. Reposicione el parlante, si es necesario, para obtener la cobertura de sonido deseada.

Afloje la tuerca (ver figura 1) y mueva el proyector a la posición deseada.
f. Antes de reinstalar la tapa a la caja, lea el párrafo III. C las Conexiones Eléctricas que se
listan abajo y haga todas las conecciones eléctricas necesarias.
2. Montaje en Conduit Embebido del Modelo AM15.
a. Retire y conserve los dos tornilos que aseguran la tapa a la caja. Retire la tapa.
b. Retire el disco variable de 7/8" de la parte posterior de la caja.
c. Instale la conexión del conduit.
NOTA
Si se desea una instalación en una caja eléctrica ya existente, se requiere una
plato adaptador opcional Modelo CC.

d. Seleccione la localización de montaje y coloque la parte posterior de la caja contra la

superficie de montaje.
e. Use los dos huecos de montaje como una platina, marque los puntos a perforar en la
superficie de montaje. Vea la figura 1 para las dimensiones y localización de los huecos
de montaje.
PRECAUCION
Antes de perforar los huecos en cualquier superficie, asegúrese de que ambos lados
de la superficie están libres de cosas que se puedan dañar.

f. Asegure la unidad a la superficie de montaje con tornillos #10 apropiados para el tipo de
material de la superficie de montaje.
PREVENCION
Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros pueden ocurrir si el proyector
no se maneja adecuadamente durante la instalación o cualquier tiempo después. NO rote el
proyector más de 180º o el cableado interno del parlante puede sufrir daños.
g. Reposicione el proyector si es necesario para obtener la cobertura de sonido deseada.
Afloje la tuerca (ver figura 1) y mueva el proyector a la posición deseada.
h. Antes de reinstalar la tapa de la caja, lea el parágrafo III.C, las conexiones eléctricas que
se listan abajo y haga todas las conecciones eléctricas necesarias.
C. Conexiones Eléctricas.
PELIGRO
Para evitar descargas eléctricas, no conecte cables cuando los circuitos estén energizados.
NOTA
Los cables de audio deben tener el tamaño correcto seleccionado por un electricista instalador
autorizado para su aplicación de servicio. Este cable requiere un par trenzado blindado con un cable
calibre 18AWG como mínimo y debe producir menos de 15% de pérdida de señal
a lo largo del tramo del cable.

Durante la instalación de estos modelos, deben seguirse los Códigos Eléctricos Nacionales así
como los locales. Todo el cableado debe hacerse a través de conduit y accesorios aprobados.
Estos sería de metal si van a servir como tierra de la caja.
-8-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Vea las figuras 2 y 3. Conecte los conductores comunes (-) de audio al terminal común del
altavoz y los conductores positivos (+) de audio al terminal (+) (SIG).
PREVENCION
Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros puede ocurrir, si la caja no se
cierra adecuadamente. Para reducir la posibilidad de explosión, la tapa de la caja del Modelo
AM15XD2 se debe mantener bien cerrado mientras los circuitos estén energizados.

2. Asegúrese de que el empaque de neopreno de la caja está bien colocado en la ranura de la

caja y reinstale la tapa de la caja.

IV. PRUEBA/OPERACION.
PRECAUCION
Bajo ciertas condiciones estos dispositivos son capaces de producir sonidos suficientemente fuertes
como para causar daños auditivos. Se debe usar adecuada protección auditiva si se va a premanecer
dentro de cierta proximidad al dispositivo cuando se está probando. Las recomendaciones de la
OSHA (EEUU) con respeto a los Niveles Estándares de Ruido (29CFR 1910) no se deben exceder.

A. Al terminar la instalación asegúrese de probar el sistema para verificar que cada altavoz fun
cione en forma satisfactoria. Si se determina que la unidad tiene un volumen demasiado
alto para el lugar donde está ubicada, ajuste el nivel de volumen del altavoz en la fuente.
PRECAUCION
Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias o incluso su muerte o la de otros puede ocurrir si la caja no se
cierra adecuadamente. Para reducir la posibilidad de explosión, la tapa de la caja del Modelo
AM15XD2 se debe mantener bien cerrado mientras los circuitos están energizados.
B. Después de terminar la prueba inicial del sistema, establezca un programa periódico de prueba
de este dispositivo
C. Provea una copia de estas instrucciones al Ingeniero de Seguridad, los operadores del sistema y
el personal de mantenimiento.

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD A LOS OPERADORES

Aún si su sistema está operando adecuadamente, el puede no ser completamente efectivo.
La gente puede no oir o atender su señal de alarma. Usted debe detectar este hecho y asegurarse
de que la señal de alarma alcance el efecto deseado por pruebas o simulacros apropiados dentro de
su aplicación específica.

V. MANTENIMIENTO.
MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA EL PERSONAL DE MANTENIMIENTO
El no seguir todas las precauciones e instrucciones que se listan a continuación, puede resultan en
daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros .
• Lea y comprenda todas las instrucciones antes de operar este equipo.
• Para reducir el riesgo de descarga eléctrica, o ignición de atmósferas peligrosas, no realice
mantenimiento a esta unidad cuando los circuitos estén energizados.
• Se deben realizar pruebas periódicas para asegurar que la efectividad de este dispositivo no se ha
reducido por que el parlante se bloquea con sustancias extrañas o hay objetos extraños delante del
parlante.
• Cualquier mantenimiento a la unidad TIENE que ser hecho por un electricista entrenado de
acuerdo con el NEC y los códigos locales.
• Nunca altere la unidad de manera alguna. La seguridad en sitios de alto riesgo puede ponerse en
peligro si se adicionan agujeros o se hacen alteraciones al Modelo AM15XD2.
• La placa, que puede tener información de importancia o precauciones para el personal de
mantenimiento, no se debera cubrir con pintura si la carcaza exterior se pinta.
-9-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A. Periódicamente revise este dispositivo para verificar que no hay sustancias extrañas dentro, o
en frente, del parlante lo que reduce su efectividad.
B. Se debe realizar una prueba periódica. Lea NFPA 72G, códigos locales de incendios o
autoridad competente para sumistrar esta información.
C. En el evento de que se requiera un ajuste de volumen, o una reparación, antes de proceder
diríjase al Mensaje de Seguridad para el Personal de Mantenimiento.

VI. SERVICIO.
PRECAUCION
Reparación o servicio no autorizado de la unidad puede resultar en degradación del desempeño
y/o daños a la propiedad, heridas graves e incluso su muerte o la de otros. Si se encuentra un mal
funcionamiento de la unidad, no intente ninguna reparación en el sitio/o reutilizar partes usadas.
La Federal Signal Corporation le hará servicio a su equipo o proveerá asistencia técnica a los
problemas que no se puedan manejar localmente.
Cualquier unidad que se devuelva a Federal Signal para servicio, inspección o reparación, debe
acompañarse de una autorización de “material devuelto” (R.M.A.). Esta R.M.A. se puede
obtener con el representante o distribuidor local del fabricante y se adjuntará una breve
explicación de la necesidad del servicio o la naturaleza del mal funcionamiento.
Dirija todas las comunicaciones y envíos a:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-10-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION POUR LE HAUT-PARLEUR AUDIOMASTER®
MODELES AM15 ET AM15XD2

AVERTISSEMENT
Le non-respect de toutes les précautions et instructions de sécurité peut résulter en dommages aux
biens, en blessures graves ou mortelles pour vous ou d’autres.

MESSAGE DE SECURITE AUX INSTALLATEURS

Ces vies humaines dépendent de votre installation de nos produits en sécurité. Il est important de
lire, comprendre et suivre toutes les instructions expédiées avec ce produit. Ce dispositif doit être
installé par un électricien professionnel qui est complètement au courant du Code Electrique
National et respectera les recommandations NEC ainsi que les codes locaux.
Le choix de l’endroit de montage du dispositif, de ses commandes et du passage des câbles doit être
effectué sous la direction de l’ingénieur des services électriques et de l’ingénieur de sécurité. De
plus, sont énumérées ci-dessous quelques autres instructions et précautions de sécurité importantes
que vous devez suivre:
• Lire et comprendre toutes les instructions avant d’installer ou d’utiliser ce matériel.
• Cet appareil doit être installé par un électricien professionnel conformément à NFPA 72, et aux
codes électriques et incendie nationaux et locaux, sous la direction de l’autorité qui a la
juridiction.
• Ne connectez pas cette unité au système si la tension est présente.
• Tous les haut-parleurs effectifs d’avertissement produisent des sons puissants qui peuvent causer
dans certaines situations une perte permanente de l’ouïe. Vous devez prendre des précautions
appropriées comme le port de protection de l’ouïe.
• Après installation, essayez le système de signalisation d’urgence pour vérifier que son
fonctionnement est correct.
• Tous les haut-parleurs d’avertissement effectifs produisent des sons forts qui peuvent causer dans
certaines situations la perte de l’ouïe. Le dispositif doit être installé suffisamment loin des
auditeurs potentiels pour limiter leur exposition tout en maintenant son efficacité. Le code OSHA
de Federal Regulations 1910.95 (Norme de bruit) donne des recommandations qui peuvent être
utilisées concernant les niveaux d’exposition au bruit permis.
• Montrez ces instructions à votre ingénieur de sécurité puis classez-les dans un endroit sûr et
référez-vous à elles lorsque vous entretenez ou réinstallez l’appareil.
• Après installation et fin du test initial du système, un programme d’essai périodique de ce
dispositif doit être établi. Référez-vous à NFPA 72G, codes locaux d’incendie et à
l’administration qui a la juridiction pour ces informations.
• Consultez l’administration qui a la juridiction dans votre zone concernant l’utilisation et
l’installation correctes de ce produit.

I. GÉNÉRALITÉS
Les modèles AudioMaster AM15 et AM15XD2 sont d’une capacité nominale convenant pour
l’intérieur et l’extérieur, les haut-parleurs d’une sortie de courant de 15 watts (8 ohms) à utiliser
avec les systèmes généraux d’appel tels que les systèmes SelectFunc® et FS.COMMS™ de
Federal Signal. Ils sont conçus pour reproduire la gamme complète de communication vocale. Ils
conviennent pour les endroits aux niveaux élevés de bruits ambiants. Le projecteur de haut-
parleur s’ajuste et peut être replacé pour obtenir la diffusion de son désirée.
Le modèle AM15XD2 convient pour les endroits dangereux de Classe I, groupes A, B, C, et D,
division 2 et de classe II, groupes F et G, division 2 classifiée et de Classe III..

-11-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 II. SPECIFICATIONS.
Tension de fonctionnement 11 Vrms max.
Puissance consommée 15 W max.
Poids (approx.) 5 lb (2,25 kg)
Impédance 8 ohms
Dimensions 12-5/8" (320 mm) de hauteur x 8-1/8" (206 mm) de
largeur x 8-1/4" (209 mm) de profondeur.
Construction Enceinte en aluminium peint en émail gris.
Carter d’amplificateur scellé avec joint
caoutchouc néoprène.

III. INSTALLATION.
A. Déballage.
Après déballage du haut-parleur, inspectez-le pour voir s’il a été endommagé pendant le
transport. S’il a été endommagé, faites une déclaration immédiatement auprès du transporteur
en indiquant les dommages. Vérifiez soigneusement toutes les enveloppes, les étiquettes
d’expédition et les étiquettes volantes avant de les retirer ou les détruire.
B. Dispositions de Montage (Voir figure 1).
ATTENTION
Pour maintenir la classification pour endroits dangereux du modèle AM15XD2, n’utilisez pas
le trou à déboucher de 7/8" (montage à conduit caché).

Le haut-parleur peut être monté sur toute surface relativement plate. La connexion conduit peut
être faite avec l’ouverture taraudée de 1/2" en bas du carter ou dans le cas du AM15, à la pièce
chassée de 7/8" à l’arrière du carter. Après sélection de l’emplacement de montage et de la
méthode de montage, procédez avec les instructions applicables ci-dessous.
AVERTISSEMENT
Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si une accumulation
d’eau, de neige, de poussières, etc. se trouvent dans le cornet du haut-parleur, réduisant gravement
ou empêchant le fonctionnement de ce dispositif. Montez l’unité de manière que le cornet du
haut-parleur soit dirigé horizontalement ou légèrement vers le bas.

1. Montage sur Surface Plane.

a. Retirez et gardez les deux vis qui fixent le couvercle sur le carter. Retirez le carter.
AVERTISSEMENT
Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si des objets se
trouvent devant le haut-parleur réduisant gravement la répartition optimale de son. Pour une
efficacité maximale, assurez-vous que l’avant du haut-parleur est dégagé de toute obstruction.

b. Sélectionnez l’emplacement de montage et placez l’arrière du carter contre la surface de

montage.
c. A l’aide des trous de montage (2) à l’intérieur du carter du Modèle AM15 ou quatre (4)
dans le support de montage externe du AM15XD2 comme gabarit, marquez les positions
de perçage sur la surface de montage. Voir figure 1 pour les emplacements des trous de
montage et les dimensions.

-12-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ATTENTION
Avant de percer des trous dans une surface, assurez-vous que les deux côtés de la surface sont
dégagés de tout élément qui pourrait être endommagé.
d. Fixez l’appareil à la surface de montage avec les 10 vis appropriées pour le type de
matière de la surface de montage.
AVERTISSEMENT
Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le cornet est
malmené pendant l’installation ou plus tard. Ne faites pas tourner le cornet de plus de 180º,
sinon le câblage intérieur du haut-parleur peut être endommagé.

e. Repositionnez le cornet du haut-parleur si nécessaire pour obtenir la couverture sonore

désirée. Desserrez l’écrou à embase (voir figure 1) et déplacez le cornet jusqu’à la
position désirée.
f. Avant de réinstaller le couvercle du carter, lisez le paragraphe III.C Connexions
électriques ci-dessous et faites les connexions électriques nécessaires.

2. Montage sur Conduit Caché Modèle AM15.

a. Retirez et gardez les deux vis qui fixent le couvercle au carter. Démonter le carter.
b. Enlever la pièce chassée 7/8" à l’arrière du carter.
c. Installez la connexion du conduit.
NOTE
Si l’installation sur un boîtier électrique existant est désirée, une plaque adaptateur
Modèle CC, en option, est nécessaire.
d. Sélectionnez l’endroit de montage et placez l’arrière du carter contre la surface du
montage.
e. A l’aide des deux trous de montage comme gabarit, marquez des positions de perçage sur
la surface de montage. Voir la figure 1 pour les emplacements des trous de montage et les
dimensions.
ATTENTION
Avant de percer des trous dans une surface, assurez-vous que les deux côtés de la surface sont
dégagés de tout élément qui pourrait être endommagé.
f. Fixez l’appareil à la surface de montage avec les 10 vis appropriées pour le type de
matière de la surface de montage.
WARNING
Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le cornet est
malmené pendant l’installation ou plus tard. Ne faites pas tourner le cornet de plus de 180º,
sinon le câblage intérieur du haut-parleur peut être endommagé.

g. Repositionnez le cornet du haut-parleur si nécessaire pour obtenir la couverture sonore

désirée. Desserrez l’écrou à collerette (voir figure 1) et déplacez le cornet jusqu’à la
position désirée.
h. Avant de réinstaller le couvercle du carter, lisez le paragraphe III.C Connexions
électriques ci-dessous et faites les connexions électriques nécessaires.

-13-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 C. Connexions Electriques.
DANGER
Pour éviter des chocs électriques, ne connectez pas les fils si les circuits sont sous tension.
NOTE
Les fils audio doivent être choisis par votre électricien d’installation agréé pour votre application de
service. Ce câble exige une paire de fils torsadés et blindés d’un mimum de 18AWG et devrait
produire au plus une perte de signal de 15% sur la longueur du câble.
Le National Electrical Code ainsi que les codes locaux doivent être respectés lors de
l’installation de ces modèles. Tout le câblage électrique doit être passé à travers des conduits et
raccords approuvés. L’utilisation de conduits et raccords métalliques est nécessaire pour
permettre la mise à la terre de l’enceinte.

1. Voir le figures 2 et 3. Connecter les fils communs (-) audio à la borne commune du haut-
parleur et aux fils positifs (+) audio à la borne (+) (SIG).
AVERTISSEMENT
Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le carter n’est pas
fermé correctement. Pour réduire la possibilité d’explosion, le couvercle de carter du Modèle
AM15XD2 doit être maintenu fermé étanche pendant que les circuits sont sous tension.
2. Assurez-vous que le joint de couvercle en caoutchouc Néoprène est bien assis dans la
rainure du carter et réinstallez le couvercle du carter.

IV. ESSAI/FONCTIONNEMENT.
AVERTISSEMENT
Dans certaines situations, ces dispositifs peuvent produire des sons suffisamment forts pour causer
des dommages à l’ouïe. Une protection adéquate de l’ouïe doit être portée si on est très près du
dispositif pendant les essais. Les recommandations de la Norme OSHA de niveau de son
(29 CFR 1910) ne doit pas être dépassées.
A. A. Après avoir terminé l’installation, assurez-vous de tester le système pour vérifier que chaque
haut-parleur fonctionne correctement. Si vous trouvez que l’appareil est trop fort pour
l’emplacement choisi, ajustez le niveau du volume du haut-parleur à la source.
AVERTISSEMENT
Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le carter n’est pas
fermé correctement. Pour réduire la possibilité d’explosion, le couvercle de carter du Modèle
AM15XD2 doit être maintenu fermé étanche pendant que les circuits sont sous tension.
B. Après fin de l’essai initial du système, établissez un programme pour essai périodique de ce
dispositif.
C. Fournissez une copie de ces instructions à l’ingénieur de sécurité, à l’opérateur du système et
au personnel d’entretien.

MESSAGE DE SECURITE AUX OPERATEURS

Même si votre système d’avertissement fonctionne correctement, il peut ne pas être complètement
efficace. Les gens peuvent ne pas voir, entendre ou respecter votre signal d’avertissement. Vous
devez reconnaître ce fait et vous assurer que votre signal d’avertissement a l’effet voulu par des
séquences correctes d’essai/formation dans votre application spécifique.

-14-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 V. ENTRETIEN.
MESSAGE DE SECURITE AU PERSONNEL D’ENTRETIEN
Le non-respect des précautions et instructions de sécurité peut en résulter en dommages aux biens,
blessures graves ou mortelles pour vous ou d’autres.
• Lire et comprendre toutes les instructions avant d’utiliser ce système.
• Pour réduire le risque de chocs électriques ou un allumage d’atmosphères dangereuses,
n’effectuez pas d’entretien ou de service sur cet appareil si les circuits sont sous tension.
• Des vérifications périodiques doivent être faites pour assurer que l’efficacité de ce dispositif n’a
pas été réduite parce que le haut-parleur s’est bouché avec des matières étrangères ou parce que
des objets ont été placés devant le haut-parleur.
• Tout entretien de cet appareil DOIT être fait par un électricien professionnel conformément aux
recommandations NEC et aux codes locaux.
• Ne jamais modifier l’unité de quelle que manière que ce soit. La sécurité dans des lieux
dangereux peut être mise en cause si des ouvertures supplémentaires ou d’autres modifications
sont faites au Modèle AM15XD2.
• Les plaques de caractéristiques, qui contiennent des informations d’avertissement ou autre,
importantes pour le personnel d’entretien, ne doivent pas être cachées si l’extérieur du dispositif
est peint.

A. Vérifiez périodiquement ce dispositif pour vérifier qu’il n’y a pas de produits étrangers dans ou
devant le haut-parleur qui puissent réduire son efficacité.
B. Un essai doit être effectué périodiquement. Référez-vous à NFPA 72G, aux codes locaux
incendie et à l’administration qui a la juridiction pour ces informations.
C. Au cas où un ajustage de volume ou une autre réparation serait nécessaire, assurez-vous de
vous référer au message de sécurité pour le personnel d’entretien avant de continuer.

VI. SERVICE.
AVERTISSEMENT
Des réparations ou un service non autorisé de cet appareil peuvent résulter en dégradation des
performances et/ou dommages aux biens, blessures graves ou mortelles pour vous ou d’autres.
Si vous découvrez un appareil ne fonctionnant pas bien, n’essayez pas de réparer sur
place ou de remplacer des pièces.
L’usine de Federal Signal fera le service de votre matériel et fournira une assistance technique
pour tout problème qui ne puisse être traité localement.
Toutes les unités renvoyées à Federal Signal pour un service, inspection ou réparation doivent être
accompagnées d’une autorisation de retour de matériel. Cette R.M.A. peut être obtenue auprès du
distributeur local ou du représentant du fabricant.
A ce moment, une courte explication du service demandé, ou la nature du mauvais
fonctionnement doit être donnée.
Adressez toutes les communications et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-15-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A" C" A" C"
MODEL
1

AM15

MODEL
AM15XD2
B" B"

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-1/4"
(57.2mm)
F F
5-5/8" 5-5/8"
(142.88mm) (142.88mm)
2-3/4" 3-1/4"
(69.9mm) (82.6mm)

E G

-16-
INCHES MM 5"
1-13/16" 13/16"
13/16" (127mm)
(46.0mm) 1/2-14 NPT 1/2-14 NPT (20.64mm)
(20.64mm) A 8-1/8" 206
2-9/16" D B 12-5/8" 320 5-1/2" 3-3/8"
(65.1mm) 3-3/8" (139.7mm) (85.73mm)
(85.73mm) C 8-1/4" 209
290A3809B

English Español
D. 7/8 dia. concealed conduit knock out mounting (in rear of housing) D. Pieza desmontable de 7/8" de diámetro (en la parte posterior de la carcasa)
E. 0.201 dia. 2 holes (mounting) E. 2 orificios de montaje dia. 0,201
F. Collar nut F. Tuerca collar
G. 0.201 dia 4 holes (mouting) G. 4 orificios de montaje dia. 0,201

Français
D. Ejection diam. 7/8" (a l'arriere de l'enceinte)
E. 2 trous de montage dia. 0,201
F. Ecrou collier
G. 4 trous de montage dia. 0,201
 2

AM15
&
AM15XD2

RED

BLK
290A3810B

English
A. Speaker models

Español
A. Parlante modelos

Français
A. Haut-parleur modeles

-17-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3

C B

COM(-)
SIG(+)

290A3808

English
A. NOTE: Label appears on this side of terminal strip. Shown here on mounting
bracket for reference only.
B. Common (-) leads to common terminal.
C. Positive (+) leads to (+) or SIG.

Español
A. NOTA: Las letras aparecen en este lado de la regleta de conexiones. Se muestran
aquí en el soporte de montaje solo como referencia
B. Conectores comunes (-) al terminal común.
C. Cables positivos (+) al terminal (+) o (SIG).

Français
A. NOTE:-Les lettres sur ce cote de la bande de borne montrees ici sur le supporte
de montage sont donnees uniquement pour reference.
B. Les cables communs (-) sur la borne commune.
C. Fils positifs (+) à la borne (+) ou (SIG).

-18-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2561540C
REV. C 500
Printed in U.S.A.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERIES C, MODELS AM300 and AM300GCX
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR SERIES C, MODEL AM300 AND
AM300GCX AUDIOMASTER® SPEAKER

SERIES C, MODELOS AM300 y AM300GCX

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN PARA PARLANTES AUDIOMASTER®
SERIES C, MODELO AM300 Y AM300GCX

SÉRIE C, MODÈLES AM300 et AM300GCX

INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION POUR LA SÉRIE C, MODÈLES AM300 et
AM300GCX AUDIOMASTER@ SPEAKER

Address all communications and shipments to:

Dirija todas la correspondencia y envíos a:
Adressez toutes les communiations et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL AM300 AND AM300GCX
AUDIOMASTER® SPEAKER
WARNING
Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage,
serious injury, or death to you or others.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS

Peoples lives depend on your safe installation of our products. It is important to follow all
instructions shipped with the products. This device is to be installed by a trained electrician who is
thoroughly familiar with the National Electric Code and will follow the NEC guidelines as well as
local codes.
The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and routing of the wiring is to be
accomplished under the direction of the Facilities Engineer and the Safety Engineer. In addition,
listed below are some other important safety instructions and precautions you should follow:
• Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this equipment.
• This unit must be installed by a qualified electrician in accordance with NFPA 72, and National
and local Electrical and Fire Codes, under the direction of the authority having jurisdiction.
• Do not connect this unit to the system when power is on.
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may cause , in certain situations,
permanent hearing loss. You should take appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing
protection.
• After installation, test the sound system to ensure proper operation.
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may cause, in certain situations,
permanent hearing loss. The device should be installed far enough away from potential listeners
to limit their exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal
Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines which may be used regarding
permissible noise exposure levels.
• Show these instructions to your Safety Engineer and then file them in a safe place and refer to
them when maintaining and/or reinstalling the unit.
• After installation and completion of initial system test, a program of periodic testing of this device
must be established. Refer to NFPA 72G, local Fire Codes and the authority having jurisdiction
for this information.
• Consult the authority having jurisdiction in your area regarding the proper use and installation of
this product.

I. GENERAL.
The AudioMaster Model AM300 and AM300GCX are 25 Vrms and 70 Vrms, indoor/outdoor
rated, selectable power output (8 and 15 watts) loudspeakers for use with fire alarm and general
signaling systems such as Federal Signal’s SelecTone® system. They are designed to reproduce
electronically generated warning tones, which command rapid recognition, and full range voice
communication. They are suitable for use in areas with high ambient noise levels. The speaker
projector is adjustable and may be repositioned to obtain desired sound distribution.
The AM300GCX is suitable for use in Class I, Groups A, B, C, & D, Division 2 and Class II,
Groups F & G, Division 2 classified and Class III locations.

II. SPECIFICATIONS.
Operating Voltage 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms
Power Input (selectable) 8 W and 15 W
Weight (approx.) 5 lb. (2.25kg)
-1-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Size 117/ " (302mm) high, 81/ " (206mm) wide,
8 8

8" (203mm) deep.

Construction Aluminum enclosure painted with grey electrostatic
powder coating.
Amplifier housing sealed with neoprene rubber gasket.
Audibility information is shown in table 1.

III. INSTALLATION.

A. Unpacking.
After unpacking the speaker, examine it carefully for possible damage that may have occurred
in transit. If equipment has been damaged, immediately file a claim with the carrier stating
extent of damage. Carefully check all shipping labels and tags for special instructions before
removing or destroying them.

B. Mounting Arrangements (See figure 1).

CAUTION
To maintain the hazardous location rating of the Model AM300GCX, do not use the 7/8" knockout
(concealed conduit mounting).
The speaker can be mounted on any relatively flat surface. Conduit connection can be made to
1/2" threaded opening at bottom of housing or, in the case of the AM300, to 7/8" knockout in
rear of housing. After the mounting location and mounting method have been selected, proceed
with the applicable instructions below.
WARNING
Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if an accumulation of water, snow, dust, etc.
resides in the speaker projector, severely reducing or preventing operation of this device.
Mount the unit so speaker projector is pointed horizontally or slightly downward.

1. Flat Surface Mounting.

a. Remove and retain the two screws that secure cover to housing. Remove the cover.
WARNING
Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if any objects are in front of speaker,
severely reducing optimum sound distribution. For maximum effectiveness, ensure that the front
of the speaker is clear of obstructions.
b. Select the mounting location and place rear of housing against mounting surface.
c. Using the mounting holes (two (2) inside the Model AM300’s housing or four (4) in the
AM300GCX’s external mounting bracket) as a template, scribe drill position marks on
the mounting surface. See figure 1 for mounting hole locations and dimensions.
CAUTION
Before drilling holes in any surface, ensure that both sides of surface are clear of items
that could be damaged.
d. Secure the unit to the mounting surface with #10 screws appropriate for the type of
mounting surface material.

-2-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WARNING
Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the projector is mishandled during
installation or over time. DO NOT rotate the projector more than 180 degrees or
internal speaker wiring may be damaged.

e. Reposition speaker projector if necessary to obtain desired sound coverage.

Loosen collar nut (see figure 1) and move projector to desired position.
f. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph III.C. Electrical Connections below
and make the necessary electrical connections.
2. Model AM300 Concealed Conduit Mounting.
a. Remove and retain the two screws that secure cover to housing. Remove the cover.
b. Remove the 7/8" knockout at rear of housing.
c. Install the conduit connection.
NOTE
If installation on an existing electrical box is desired, an optional Model CC adapter
plate is required.
d. Select the mounting location and place rear of housing against mounting surface.
e. Using the two (2) mounting holes as a template, scribe drill position marks on the
mounting surface. See figure 1 for mounting hole locations and dimensions.
CAUTION
Before drilling holes in any surface, ensure that both sides of surface are clear of items
that could be damaged.
f. Secure the unit to the mounting surface with #10 screws appropriate for the type of
mounting surface material.
WARNING
Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the projector is mishandled during
installation or over time. DO NOT rotate the projector more than 180 degrees or
internal speaker wiring may be damaged.

g. Reposition speaker projector if necessary to obtain desired sound coverage. Loosen collar
nut (see figure 1) and move projector to desired position.
h. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph III.C. Electrical Connections below
and make the necessary electrical connections.

C. Electrical Connections.
DANGER
To avoid electrical shock, do not connect wires when circuits are energized.
NOTE
Audio wires should be sized properly by your licensed installation electrician for your service
application. This cable requires a twisted shielded pair with an 18AWG minimum and should
produce no more than 15% signal loss over the length of the cable run.

National Electrical Code as well as local codes must be adhered to in installation of these
models. All electrical wiring must be routed through approved conduit and fittings. The use of
metal conduit and fittings is required to provide grounding of the enclosure.
1. See figures 2 and 3. Connect the audio common (-) leads to the speaker’s common terminal
and audio positive (+) leads to desired wattage terminal.

-3-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WARNING
An uninsulated section of a single conductor must NOT be looped around a terminal and used as two
separate connections. NFPA 72 requires that the wire is severed to provide electrical
supervision of the connection.

2. The AM300 and AM300GCX are factory configured for 25 Vrms operation. If 70 Vrms
operation is desired, remove the wire leading to the speaker from the terminal marked 25V
and connect it to the terminal marked 70 V. (see figure 3).
WARNING
Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the housing is not closed properly.
To reduce the possibility of explosion, the Model AM300GCX’s housing cover must
be kept tight while circuits are energized.
3. Be sure the neoprene rubber cover gasket is properly seated in the housing groove and
reinstall housing cover.

IV. TESTING/OPERATING.
WARNING
Under certain conditions these devices are capable of producing sounds loud enough to cause
hearing damage. Adequate hearing protection should be worn if standing within close proximity
to device while testing. Recommendations in the OSHA Sound Level Standard
(29 CFR 1910) should not be exceeded.
A. After installation is complete, be sure to test the system to verify that each speaker operates
satisfactorily. If it is found that the unit is too loud for its location, a lower wattage tap may be
selected. Carefully remove the housing cover and move the positive (+) lead to a lower wattage
tap (see figure 3). Reinstall the housing cover and retest.
WARNING
Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the housing is not closed properly.
To reduce the possibility of explosion, the Model AM300GCX’s housing cover must
be kept tight while circuits are energized.
B. After completion of initial system test, establish a program for periodic testing of this device.
C. Provide a copy of these instructions for the Safety Engineer, system operator(s) and
maintenance personnel.
SAFETY MESSAGE TO OPERATORS
Even if your warning system is operating properly, it may not be completely effective. People may
not hear or heed your warning signal. You must recognize this fact and ensure that your warning
signal achieves its intended effect through proper test/training sequences within your specific
application(s).

V. MAINTENANCE.
SAFETY MESSAGE TO MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL
Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage,
serious injury, or death to you or others.
• Read and understand all instructions before performing maintenance on this unit.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, or ignition of hazardous atmospheres, do not perform
maintenance or service on this unit when circuits are energized.
• Periodic checks should be made to ensure that effectiveness of this device has not been reduced
because speaker has become clogged with a foreign substance or because objects have been
placed in front of the speaker.
-4-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Any maintenance to this unit MUST be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with
NEC guidelines and local codes.
• Never alter this unit in any manner. Safety in hazardous locations may be jeopardized if additional
openings or alterations are made to Model AM300GCX.
• The nameplates, which contain cautionary or other information of importance to maintenance
personnel, should not be obscured if exterior of device is painted.
A. Periodically check this device to verify that there are no foreign substances in, or in front of,
the speaker which will reduce its effectiveness.
B. Testing should be periodically performed. Refer to NFPA 72G, local Fire Codes and the
authority having jurisdiction for information.
C. In the event a volume adjustment or other repair is required, be sure to refer to the Safety
Message For Maintenance Personnel before proceeding.

VI. SERVICE.
WARNING
Unauthorized repair/servicing of the unit may result in degradation of performance and/or property
damage, serious injury, or death to you or others. If a malfunctioning unit is encountered,
do not attempt any field repair/retrofit of parts.
Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with any problems that
cannot be handled locally.
Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair, must be accompanied by a
Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A. can be obtained from the local Distributor or
Manufacturer’s Representative.
At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the malfunction, should
be given.
Address all communications and shipments to:
FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-5-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN PARA PARLANTES AUDIOMASTER® SERIES C,
MODELO AM300 Y AM300GCX
PRECAUCION
El no seguir todas las instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad puede acarrear daños a la propiedad,
heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros.
MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD A LOS INSTALADORES
La vida de personas depende de la instalación segura de nuestros productos. Es importante seguir
todas las instrucciones empacadas con los productos. Este dispositivo lo debe instalar un electricista
calificado que esté familiarizado con el Código Nacional Eléctrico y siga las normas así como los
códigos locales.
La selección del sitio de montaje del dispositivo, sus controles y la ruta del alambrado, se hará bajo
la dirección del Ingeniero de las facilidades y del Ingeniero de seguridad. Sin embargo, a
continuación se listan algunas otras instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad que se deben seguir:
• Lea y comprenda todas las instrucciones antes de instalar u operar este equipo.
• Esta unidad debe ser instalada por un electricista calificado de acuerdo con el NFPA 72 y los
códigos eléctricos y de incendio Nacionales y locales, bajo la dirección de la autoridad
competente.
• No conecte esta unidad al sistema si está encendido.
• Todos los parlantes efectivos de prevención producen sonidos fuertes, que pueden causar en
ciertas ocasiones, pérdida permanente del oído y se deben tomar las debidas precauciones tales
como usar protectores auditivos.
• Después de instalado, asegúrese de que el sistema de sonido ofrece una operación apropiada.
• Todos los parlantes efectivos de prevención producen sonidos tan fuertes que pueden causar
pérdida permanente del oído. El aparato debe ser instalado lo bastante lejos de los oyentes
potenciales para limitar su exposición mientras mantenga su efectividad. El código OSHA
1910.95 (EEUU) de regulación Federal del ruido, da las guías que deben usarse para los niveles
de exposición permisible al ruido.
• Enseñe estas instrucciones a su Ingeniero de Seguridad y después archívelas en un lugar seguro y
consúltelas cuando le haga mantenimiento o reinstale la unidad.
• Después de la instalación y prueba inicial del sistema, programe pruebas periódicas de este
aparato. Diríjase al NFPA 72G, los Códigos locales de incendio y la autoridad competente para
obtener esta información.
• Consulte con la autoridad competente en su área, lo correspondiente al correcto uso e instalación
de este producto.
I. GENERAL.
Los AudioMaster® Modelos AM300 y AM300GCX son altoparlantes, de potencia de salida
seleccionable (0,5 a 15 vatios), para interior o intemperie, de 25Vrms y 70Vrms. Son para uso
como alarma de incendio y sistemas de señales generales como el sistema SelecTone de Federal
Signal. Están diseñados para reproducir tonos de alarma generados electrónicamente, los cuales
comandan un reconocimiento rápido y un amplio rango de comunicación de voces. Son ideales
para usar en áreas con un alto nivel de ruido. El proyector del parlante es ajustable y puede
reposicionarse para obtener la distribución de sonido deseada.
El AM300GCX es adecuado para utilizar en sitios Clase 1, Grupos A, B, C, y D, División 2, Clase
II, Grupos F y G, División 2 clasificados y Clase III.
II. ESPECIFICACIONES.
Voltaje de operación 25 Vrms o 70 Vrms
Corriente de entrada (seleccionable) 8W y 15W
Peso (aproximado) 5lbs (2,25 kg)
Tamaño 302mm (alto), 206mm (ancho), 203mm (largo)
-6-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Construcción Caja de aluminio pintada con una capa de polvo
electrostático gris.
Caja del amplificador sellada con un empaque
de neopreno.
Información de Audibilidad se muestra en la tabla 1.

III. INSTALACION.

A. Desempaque.
Después de desempacar la unidad, examine cuidadosamente si hay daños de transporte. Si
hubo daños, haga de inmediato un reclamo al transportador, estableciendo el monto del daño.
Revise cuidadosamente todos los sellos de embarque y marquillas por instrucciones especiales
antes de removerlos o destruirlos.

B. Arreglos de montaje (Ver figura 1).

PREVENCION
Para mantener la clasificación de seguridad en áreas peligrosas del Modelo AM300GCX,
no use el disco removible de 7/8" (montaje en conduit embebido).
El parlante puede ser montado en una superficie relativamente plana. Las conexiones de
conduit pueden ser de rosca de 1/2" con entrada en la parte baja de la caja. También el Modelo
AM300 puede ser montado por un disco removible al fondo de la caja. Después de que la
localización de montaje y el método de montaje ha sido seleccionado, proceda con las
instrucciones que se listan a continuación.
PRECAUCION
Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias o la muerte podrían ocurrir si se presenta una acumulación de
agua, nieve , polvo, etc en el parlante, lo que reduce severamente o evita la operación del dispositivo.
Manatenga el parlante en posición horizontal o con una ligera inclinación hacia abajo.

1. Montaje en Superficie Plana.

a. Afloje los 2 tornillos que aseguran la tapa de la caja. Retire la tapa.
PRECAUCION
Daños a la propiedad, heridos graves o incluso su muerte o la de otros puede ocurrir si cualquier
objeto está en frente del parlante, reduciendo severamente la distribución óptima del sonido.
Para mayor efectividad, asegúrese de que el frente del parlante esté
despejado de cualquier obstáculo.
b. Seleccione la localización de montaje y coloque la parte posterior de la caja contra la
superficie de montaje.
c. Usando los huecos de montaje (dos dentro de la caja del Modelo AM300 o 4 en el soporte
de montaje del Modelo AM300GCX) como una plantilla, marque los puntos a perforar en
la superficie de montaje. Vea la figura 1 para localización y dimensión de los huecos de
montaje.
PREVENCION
Antes de perforar los huecos en cualquier superficie, asegúrese de que ambos lados de la superficie
están despejados de cualquier cosa que puede dañarse.

-7-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 d. Asegure la unidad a la superficie de montaje con tornillos #10 apropiados para el tipo de
material de la superficie de montaje.
PRECAUCION
Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso la muerte pueden ocurrir si el parlante es mal
manejado durante la instalación o con el tiempo. NO rote el parlante más de
180º o el cableado interno del parlante sufrirá daños.
e. Reposicione el parlante, si es necesario, para obtener la cobertura de sonido deseada.
Afloje la tuerca (ver figura 1) y mueva el proyector a la posición deseada.
f. Antes de reinstalar la tapa a la caja, lea el párrafo III. C las Conexiones Eléctricas que se
listan abajo y haga todas las conecciones eléctricas necesarias.
2. Montaje en Conduit Embebido del Modelo AM300.
a. Retire y conserve los dos tornilos que aseguran la tapa a la caja. Retire la tapa.
b. Retire el disco variable de 7/8" de la parte posterior de la caja.
c. Instale la conexión del conduit.
NOTA
Si se desea una instalación en una caja eléctrica ya existente, se requiere una
plato adaptador opcional Modelo CC.
d. Seleccione la localización de montaje y coloque la parte posterior de la caja contra la
superficie de montaje.
e. Use los dos huecos de montaje como una platina, marque los puntos a perforar en la
superficie de montaje. Vea la figura 1 para las dimensiones y localización de los huecos
de montaje.
PRECAUCION
Antes de perforar los huecos en cualquier superficie, asegúrese de que ambos lados
de la superficie están libres de cosas que se puedan dañar.
f. Asegure la unidad a la superficie de montaje con tornillos #10 apropiados para el tipo de
material de la superficie de montaje.
PREVENCION
Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros pueden ocurrir si el proyector
no se maneja adecuadamente durante la instalación o cualquier tiempo después. NO rote el
proyector más de 180º o el cableado interno del parlante puede sufrir daños.
g. Reposicione el proyector si es necesario para obtener la cobertura de sonido deseada.
Afloje la tuerca (ver figura 1) y mueva el proyector a la posición deseada.
h. Antes de reinstalar la tapa de la caja, lea el parágrafo III.C, las conexiones eléctricas que
se listan abajo y haga todas las conecciones eléctricas necesarias.
C. Conexiones Eléctricas.
PELIGRO
Para evitar descargas eléctricas, no conecte cables cuando los circuitos estén energizados.
NOTA
Los cables de audio deben tener el tamaño correcto seleccionado por un electricista instalador
autorizado para su aplicación de servicio. Este cable requiere un par trenzado blindado con un cable
calibre 18AWG como mínimo y debe producir menos de 15% de pérdida de señal
a lo largo del tramo del cable.
Durante la instalación de estos modelos, deben seguirse los Códigos Eléctricos Nacionales así
como los locales. Todo el cableado debe hacerse a través de conduit y accesorios aprobados.
Estos sería de metal si van a servir como tierra de la caja.
-8-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Vea las figuras 2 y 3. Conecte las terminales negativas (-) de audio a la terminal negativa
del parlante y las terminales positivas (+) de audio a la terminal de potencia deseada.
AVISO
Una sección sin aislante con un solo conductor NO debe hacer circuito alrededor de un terminal
y sea usado como dos conexiones separadas. La NFPA 72 require que el cable sea cortado
para dar supervisión eléctrica a la conexión.
2. Los Modelos AM300 y AM300GCX están configurados de fábrica para 25Vrms de
operación. Si se desean 70 Vrms de operación, remueva el extremo del cable del parlante
de la terminal marcada como 25V y conéctelo a la terminal marcada como 70V (ver
figura 2).
PREVENCION
Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros puede ocurrir, si la caja no se
cierra adecuadamente. Para reducir la posibilidad de explosión, la tapa de la caja del Modelo
AM300GCX se debe mantener bien cerrado mientras los circuitos estén energizados.
3. Asegúrese de que el empaque de neopreno de la caja está bien colocado en la ranura de la
caja y reinstale la tapa de la caja.

IV. PRUEBA/OPERACION.
PRECAUCION
Bajo ciertas condiciones estos dispositivos son capaces de producir sonidos suficientemente fuertes
como para causar daños auditivos. Se debe usar adecuada protección auditiva si se va a premanecer
dentro de cierta proximidad al dispositivo cuando se está probando. Las recomendaciones de la
OSHA (EEUU) con respeto a los Niveles Estándares de Ruido (29CFR 1910) no se deben exceder.
A. Después de que la instalación se ha terminado, prueba el sistema para verificar que cada
parlante opera satisfactoriamente. Si se encuentra que la unidad es muy ruidosa para la
localización, se debe seleccionar una corriente más baja. Cuidadosamente remueva la tapa de
la caja y mueva la terminal positiva (+) para bajar la corriente (ver figura 2). Reinstale la tapa
de la caja y prueba el sistema nuevamente.
PRECAUCION
Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias o incluso su muerte o la de otros puede ocurrir si la caja no se
cierra adecuadamente. Para reducir la posibilidad de explosión, la tapa de la caja del Modelo
AM300GCX se debe mantener bien cerrado mientras los circuitos están energizados.

B. Después de terminar la prueba inicial del sistema, establezca un programa periódico de prueba
de este dispositivo
C. Provea una copia de estas instrucciones al Ingeniero de Seguridad, los operadores del sistema y
el personal de mantenimiento.

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD A LOS OPERADORES

Aún si su sistema está operando adecuadamente, el puede no ser completamente efectivo. La
gente puede no oir o atender su señal de alarma. Usted debe detectar este hecho y asegurarse de
que la señal de alarma alcance el efecto deseado por pruebas o simulacros apropiados dentro de su
aplicación específica.

V. MANTENIMIENTO.
MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA EL PERSONAL DE MANTENIMIENTO
El no seguir todas las precauciones e instrucciones que se listan a continuación, puede resultan en
daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros .

-9-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Lea y comprenda todas las instrucciones antes de operar este equipo.
• Para reducir el riesgo de descarga eléctrica, o ignición de atmósferas peligrosas, no realice
mantenimiento a esta unidad cuando los circuitos estén energizados.
• Se deben realizar pruebas periódicas para asegurar que la efectividad de este dispositivo no se ha
reducido por que el parlante se bloquea con sustancias extrañas o hay objetos extraños delante del
parlante.
• Cualquier mantenimiento a la unidad TIENE que ser hecho por un electricista entrenado de
acuerdo con el NEC y los códigos locales.
• Nunca altere la unidad de manera alguna. La seguridad en sitios de alto riesgo puede ponerse en
peligro si se adicionan agujeros o se hacen alteraciones al Modelo AM300GCX.
• La placa, que puede tener información de importancia o precauciones para el personal de
mantenimiento, no se debera cubrir con pintura si la carcaza exterior se pinta.

A. Periódicamente revise este dispositivo para verificar que no hay sustancias extrañas dentro, o
en frente, del parlante lo que reduce su efectividad.
B. Se debe realizar una prueba periódica. Lea NFPA 72G, códigos locales de incendios o
autoridad competente para sumistrar esta información.
C. En el evento de que se requiera un ajuste de volumen, o una reparación, antes de proceder
diríjase al Mensaje de Seguridad para el Personal de Mantenimiento.

VI. SERVICIO.
PRECAUCION
Reparación o servicio no autorizado de la unidad puede resultar en degradación del desempeño
y/o daños a la propiedad, heridas graves e incluso su muerte o la de otros. Si se encuentra un mal
funcionamiento de la unidad, no intente ninguna reparación en el sitio/o reutilizar partes usadas.

La Federal Signal Corporation le hará servicio a su equipo o proveerá asistencia técnica a los
problemas que no se puedan manejar localmente.
Cualquier unidad que se devuelva a Federal Signal para servicio, inspección o reparación, debe
acompañarse de una autorización de “material devuelto” (R.M.A.). Esta R.M.A. se puede
obtener con el representante o distribuidor local del fabricante y se adjuntará una breve
explicación de la necesidad del servicio o la naturaleza del mal funcionamiento.
Dirija todas las comunicaciones y envíos a:
FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-10-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION POUR LA SÉRIE C, MODÈLES AM300 et
AM300GCX AUDIOMASTER@ SPEAKER

AVERTISSEMENT
Le non-respect de toutes les précautions et instructions de sécurité peut résulter en dommages aux
biens, en blessures graves ou mortelles pour vous ou d’autres.

MESSAGE DE SECURITE AUX INSTALLATEURS

Ces vies humaines dépendent de votre installation de nos produits en sécurité. Il est important de
lire, comprendre et suivre toutes les instructions expédiées avec ce produit. Ce dispositif doit être
installé par un électricien professionnel qui est complètement au courant du Code Electrique
National et respectera les recommandations NEC ainsi que les codes locaux.
Le choix de l’endroit de montage du dispositif, de ses commandes et du passage des câbles doit être
effectué sous la direction de l’ingénieur des services électriques et de l’ingénieur de sécurité. De
plus, sont énumérées ci-dessous quelques autres instructions et précautions de sécurité
importantes que vous devez suivre:
• Lire et comprendre toutes les instructions avant d’installer ou d’utiliser ce matériel.
• Cet appareil doit être installé par un électricien professionnel conformément à NFPA 72, et aux
codes électriques et incendie nationaux et locaux, sous la direction de l’autorité qui a la
juridiction.
• Ne connectez pas cette unité au système si la tension est présente.
• Tous les haut-parleurs effectifs d’avertissement produisent des sons puissants qui peuvent causer
dans certaines situations une perte permanente de l’ouïe. Vous devez prendre des précautions
appropriées comme le port de protection de l’ouïe.
• Après installation, essayez le système de signalisation d’urgence pour vérifier que son
fonctionnement est correct.
• Tous les haut-parleurs d’avertissement effectifs produisent des sons forts qui peuvent causer dans
certaines situations la perte de l’ouïe. Le dispositif doit être installé suffisamment loin des
auditeurs potentiels pour limiter leur exposition tout en maintenant son efficacité. Le code OSHA
de Federal Regulations 1910.95 (Norme de bruit) donne des recommandations qui peuvent être
utilisées concernant les niveaux d’exposition au bruit permis.
• Montrez ces instructions à votre ingénieur de sécurité puis classez-les dans un endroit sûr et
référez-vous à elles lorsque vous entretenez ou réinstallez l’appareil.
• Après installation et fin du test initial du système, un programme d’essai périodique de ce
dispositif doit être établi. Référez-vous à NFPA 72G, codes locaux d’incendie et à
l’administration qui a la juridiction pour ces informations.
• Consultez l’administration qui a la juridiction dans votre zone concernant l’utilisation et
l’installation correctes de ce produit.

I. GENERALITES.
Les AudioMaster Modèles AM300 et AM300GCX sont des haut-parleurs de 25 Vrms et 70 Vrms,
pour utilisation à l’intérieur et à l’extérieur, à sortie de puissance sélectionnable (0,5 à 15 watts)
pour utilisation avec alarme incendie et systèmes de signalisation généraux comme le système
SelecTone® de Federal Signal. Ils sont conàus pour reproduire des tonalités d’avertissement
générées électroniquement, qui commandent une reconnaissance rapide, et communication vocale
sur toute la gamme. Ils conviennent pour utilisation dans des zones avec niveaux de bruit ambiant
élevés. Le cornet du haut-parleur est ajustable et peut être repositionné pour obtenir la répartition
sonore désirée.
Le modèle Am300GCX convient pour les emplacements de Classe I, groupes A, B, C, et D,
division 2 et de classe II, groupes F et G, division 2 classifiée et de Classe III.
-11-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 II. SPECIFICATIONS.
Tension de service 25 Vrms ou 70 Vrms
Puissance à l’entrée (sélectionnable) 8W and 15W
Poids 5 lbs (2,25kg)
Dimensions 11-7/8" (302 mm) de hauteur x 8-1/8" (206 mm) de
largeur x 8" (203 mm) de profondeur.
Construction Enceinte d’aluminium peinte avec un revêtement de
poudre électrostatique grise.
Carter d’amplificateur scellé avec joint
caoutchouc néoprène.
Les informations sur l’audibilité sont données au tableau 1

III. INSTALLATION.
A. Déballage.
Après déballage du haut-parleur, inspectez-le pour voir s’il a été endommagé pendant le
transport. S’il a été endommagé, faites une déclaration immédiatement auprès du transporteur
en indiquant les dommages. Vérifiez soigneusement toutes les enveloppes, les étiquettes
d’expédition et les étiquettes volantes avant de les retirer ou les détruire.
B. Dispositions de Montage (Voir figure 1).
ATTENTION
Pour maintenir la classification pour endroits dangereux du modèle AM300GCX, n’utilisez pas
le trou à déboucher de 7/8" (montage à conduit caché).
Le haut-parleur peut être monté sur toute surface relativement plate. La connexion conduit peut
être faite avec l’ouverture taraudée de 1/2" en bas du carter ou dans le cas du AM300, à la
pièce chassée de 7/8" à l’arrière du carter. Après sélection de l’emplacement de montage et de
la méthode de montage, procédez avec les instructions applicables ci-dessous.
AVERTISSEMENT
Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si une accumulation
d’eau, de neige, de poussières, etc. se trouvent dans le cornet du haut-parleur, réduisant gravement
ou empêchant le fonctionnement de ce dispositif. Montez l’unité de manière que le cornet du
haut-parleur soit dirigé horizontalement ou légèrement vers le bas.

1. Montage sur Surface Plane.

a. Retirez et gardez les deux vis qui fixent le couvercle sur le carter. Retirez le carter.
AVERTISSEMENT
Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si des objets se
trouvent devant le haut-parleur réduisant gravement la répartition optimale de son. Pour une
efficacité maximale, assurez-vous que l’avant du haut-parleur est dégagé de toute obstruction.

b. Sélectionnez l’emplacement de montage et placez l’arrière du carter contre la surface de

montage.
c. A l’aide des trous de montage (2) à l’intérieur du carter du Modèle AM300 ou quatre (4)
dans le support de montage externe du AM300GCX comme gabarit, marquez les
positions de perçage sur la surface de montage. Voir figure 1 pour les emplacements des
trous de montage et les dimensions.

-12-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ATTENTION
Avant de percer des trous dans une surface, assurez-vous que les deux côtés de la surface sont
dégagés de tout élément qui pourrait être endommagé.
d. Fixez l’appareil à la surface de montage avec les 10 vis appropriées pour le type de
matière de la surface de montage.
AVERTISSEMENT
Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le cornet est
malmené pendant l’installation ou plus tard. Ne faites pas tourner le cornet de plus de 180º,
sinon le câblage intérieur du haut-parleur peut être endommagé.
e. Repositionnez le cornet du haut-parleur si nécessaire pour obtenir la couverture sonore
désirée. Desserrez l’écrou à embase (voir figure 1) et déplacez le cornet jusqu’à la
position désirée.
f. Avant de réinstaller le couvercle du carter, lisez le paragraphe III.C Connexions
électriques ci-dessous et faites les connexions électriques nécessaires.
2. Montage sur Conduit Caché Modèle AM300.
a. Retirez et gardez les deux vis qui fixent le couvercle au carter. Démonter le carter.
b. Enlever la pièce chassée 7/8" à l’arrière du carter.
c. Installez la connexion du conduit.
NOTE
Si l’installation sur un boîtier électrique existant est désirée, une plaque adaptateur
Modèle CC, en option, est nécessaire.
d. Sélectionnez l’endroit de montage et placez l’arrière du carter contre la surface du
montage.
e. A l’aide des deux trous de montage comme gabarit, marquez des positions de perçage sur
la surface de montage. Voir la figure 1 pour les emplacements des trous de montage et les
dimensions.
ATTENTION
Avant de percer des trous dans une surface, assurez-vous que les deux côtés de la surface sont
dégagés de tout élément qui pourrait être endommagé.
f. Fixez l’appareil à la surface de montage avec les 10 vis appropriées pour le type de
matière de la surface de montage.
WARNING
Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le cornet est
malmené pendant l’installation ou plus tard. Ne faites pas tourner le cornet de plus de 180º,
sinon le câblage intérieur du haut-parleur peut être endommagé.
g. Repositionnez le cornet du haut-parleur si nécessaire pour obtenir la couverture sonore
désirée. Desserrez l’écrou à collerette (voir figure 1) et déplacez le cornet jusqu’à la
position désirée.
h. Avant de réinstaller le couvercle du carter, lisez le paragraphe III.C Connexions
électriques ci-dessous et faites les connexions électriques nécessaires.
C. Connexions Electriques.
DANGER
Pour éviter des chocs électriques, ne connectez pas les fils si les circuits sont sous tension.
NOTE
Les fils audio doivent être choisis par votre électricien d’installation agréé pour votre application de
service. Ce câble exige une paire de fils torsadés et blindés d’un mimum de 18AWG et devrait
produire au plus une perte de signal de 15% sur la longueur du câble.
-13-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Le National Electrical Code ainsi que les codes locaux doivent être respectés lors de
l’installation de ces modèles. Tout le câblage électrique doit être passé à travers des conduits et
raccords approuvés. L’utilisation de conduits et raccords métalliques est nécessaire pour
permettre la mise à la terre de l’enceinte.

1. Voir figures 2 et 3. Connectez les câbles audio commun (-) à la borne commune du haut-
parleur et le positif audio (+) à la borne de puissance désirée.
AVERTISSEMENT
Une partie non isolée d’un conducteur unique ne doit PAS être mise en boucle autour d’une borne et
utilisée comme étant deux connexions séparées. NFPA 72 exige que le fil soit coupé pour
permettre la supervision électrique de la connexion.
2. Les AM300 et AM300GCX sont configurés en usine pour fonctionnement en 25 Vrms. Si un
fonctionnement en 70 Vrms est désiré, retirez le fil allant au haut-parleur depuis la borne
marquée 25V et connectez-le à la borne marquée 70V (voir figure 3).
AVERTISSEMENT
Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le carter n’est pas
fermé correctement. Pour réduire la possibilité d’explosion, le couvercle de carter du Modèle
AM300GCX doit être maintenu fermé étanche pendant que les circuits sont sous tension.

3. Assurez-vous que le joint de couvercle en caoutchouc Néoprène est bien assis dans la
rainure du carter et réinstallez le couvercle du carter.

IV. ESSAI/FONCTIONNEMENT.
AVERTISSEMENT
Dans certaines situations, ces dispositifs peuvent produire des sons suffisamment forts pour causer
des dommages à l’ouïe. Une protection adéquate de l’ouïe doit être portée si on est très près du
dispositif pendant les essais. Les recommandations de la Norme OSHA de niveau de son
(29 CFR 1910) ne doit pas être dépassées.

A. Une fois l’installation terminée, n’oubliez pas d’essayer le système pour vérifier que chaque
haut-parleur fonctionne de manière satisfaisante. Si on trouve que l’appareil est trop fort pour
son emplacement, une prise de puissance plus faible peut être sélectionnée. Retirez
soigneusement le couvercle de carter et déplacez le câble positif (à) pour le mettre sur une prise
de puissance plus faible (voir figure ). Réinstallez le couvercle de carter et refaites l’essai.
AVERTISSEMENT
Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le carter n’est pas
fermé correctement. Pour réduire la possibilité d’explosion, le couvercle de carter du Modèle
AM300GCX doit être maintenu fermé étanche pendant que les circuits sont sous tension.
B. Après fin de l’essai initial du système, établissez un programme pour essai périodique de ce
dispositif.
C. Fournissez une copie de ces instructions à l’ingénieur de sécurité, à l’opérateur du système et
au personnel d’entretien.

MESSAGE DE SECURITE AUX OPERATEURS

Même si votre système d’avertissement fonctionne correctement, il peut ne pas être complètement
efficace. Les gens peuvent ne pas voir, entendre ou respecter votre signal d’avertissement. Vous
devez reconnaître ce fait et vous assurer que votre signal d’avertissement a l’effet voulu par des
séquences correctes d’essai/formation dans votre application spécifique.

-14-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 V. ENTRETIEN.
MESSAGE DE SECURITE AU PERSONNEL D’ENTRETIEN
Le non-respect des précautions et instructions de sécurité peut en résulter en dommages aux biens,
blessures graves ou mortelles pour vous ou d’autres.
• Lire et comprendre toutes les instructions avant d’utiliser ce système.
• Pour réduire le risque de chocs électriques ou un allumage d’atmosphères dangereuses,
n’effectuez pas d’entretien ou de service sur cet appareil si les circuits sont sous tension.
• Des vérifications périodiques doivent être faites pour assurer que l’efficacité de ce dispositif n’a
pas été réduite parce que le haut-parleur s’est bouché avec des matières étrangères ou parce que
des objets ont été placés devant le haut-parleur.
• Tout entretien de cet appareil DOIT être fait par un électricien professionnel conformément aux
recommandations NEC et aux codes locaux.
• Ne jamais modifier l’unité de quelle que manière que ce soit. La sécurité dans des lieux
dangereux peut être mise en cause si des ouvertures supplémentaires ou d’autres modifications
sont faites au Modèle AM300GCX.
• Les plaques de caractéristiques, qui contiennent des informations d’avertissement ou autre,
importantes pour le personnel d’entretien, ne doivent pas être cachées si l’extérieur du dispositif
est peint.

A. Vérifiez périodiquement ce dispositif pour vérifier qu’il n’y a pas de produits étrangers dans ou
devant le haut-parleur qui puissent réduire son efficacité.
B. Un essai doit être effectué périodiquement. Référez-vous à NFPA 72G, aux codes locaux
incendie et à l’administration qui a la juridiction pour ces informations.
C. Au cas où un ajustage de volume ou une autre réparation serait nécessaire, assurez-vous de
vous référer au message de sécurité pour le personnel d’entretien avant de continuer.

VI. SERVICE.
AVERTISSEMENT
Des réparations ou un service non autorisé de cet appareil peuvent résulter en dégradation des
performances et/ou dommages aux biens, blessures graves ou mortelles pour vous ou d’autres.
Si vous découvrez un appareil ne fonctionnant pas bien, n’essayez pas de réparer sur
place ou de remplacer des pièces.
L’usine de Federal Signal fera le service de votre matériel et fournira une assistance technique
pour tout problème qui ne puisse être traité localement.
Toutes les unités renvoyées à Federal Signal pour un service, inspection ou réparation doivent être
accompagnées d’une autorisation de retour de matériel. Cette R.M.A. peut être obtenue auprès du
distributeur local ou du représentant du fabricant.
A ce moment, une courte explication du service demandé, ou la nature du mauvais
fonctionnement doit être donnée.
Adressez toutes les communications et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-15-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table 1.

Power UL Omnidirectional Sound Level dB(A)

Tap Sound Level @ 10' dB(A) @ 10' on axis
8 watt 99 106
15 watt 99 109

Tabla 1.

Corriente Nivel de Sonido UL Sonido

@ 10' dB (A) dB (A)
8 watt 99 106
15 watt 99 109

Tableau 1.

Prise de Niveau de Son Puissance

Puissance UL @ 10' dB(A) Acoustique dB(A)
8 watt 99 106
15 watt 99 109

-16-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A" C" A" C"
MODEL
1

AM300

MODEL
AM300GCX

B" B"

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-1/4"
(57.2mm)
F F
5-5/8" 5-5/8"
(142.88mm) (142.88mm)
2-3/4" 3-1/4"
(69.9mm) (82.6mm)

E G
5"

-17-
1-13/16" INCHES MM 13/16"
13/16" (127mm)
(46.0mm) 1/2-14 NPT 1/2-14 NPT (20.64mm)
(20.64mm) A 8-1/8" 206
2-9/16" D B 12-5/8" 320 5-1/2" 3-3/8"
(65.1mm) 3-3/8" (139.7mm) (85.73mm)
(85.73mm) C 8-1/4" 209
290A2627-67B

English Español
D. 7/8 dia. concealed conduit knock out mounting (in rear of housing) D. Pieza desmontable de 7/8" de diámetro (en la parte posterior de la carcasa)
E. 0.201 dia. 2 holes (mounting) E. 2 orificios de montaje dia. 0,201
F. Collar nut F. Tuerca collar
G. 0.201 dia 4 holes (mouting) G. 4 orificios de montaje dia. 0,201

Français
D. Ejection diam. 7/8" (a l'arriere de l'enceinte)
E. 2 trous de montage dia. 0,201
F. Ecrou collier
G. 4 trous de montage dia. 0,201
 2

AM300
&
AM300GCX

RED
BLK
290A2773B

English
A. Speaker models

Español
A. Parlante modelos

Français
A. Haut-parleur modeles

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3

COM

15W

25V

70V
8W
*
*
*
B

YEL

290A2627-08B

English
A. NOTE: Letters appear on this side of terminal strip. Shown here on mounting
bracket for reference only.
B. Speaker internal yellow lead to be connected to 25V or 70V terminal,
depending upon external signal source voltage.
C. Positive (+) leads to 1 of 2 available wattage terminals.
D. Common (-) leads to common terminal.
* Not Used

Español
A. NOTA: Las letras aparecen en este lado de la regleta de conexiones. Se muestran
aquí en el soporte de montaje solo como referencia
B. El conector amarillo interno del altavoz debe de conectarse al terminal de
25V o 70V dependiendo del voltaje de la fuente de señal externa.
C. Conectores positivos (+) a 1 de los 2 terminales de vatiaje
D. Conectores comunes (-) al terminal común
* NO USADO

Français
A. NOTE:-Les lettres sur ce cote de la bande de borne montrees ici sur le supporte
de montage sont donnees uniquement pour reference.
B. Le cable interne jaune du haut-parleur est a etre connecte sur la borne de
25V ou 70V (en fonction de la tension de source de signal externe)
C. Les cables de champ positif (+) sur les bornes de 1 a 2 de puissance
en watt disponibles.
D. Les cables communs (-) sur la borne commune.
* PAS UTILISÉ

2561140E
REV. E 4/00
Printed in U.S.A.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MODELS AMSF-25 AND AMSS-25
INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR
MODELS AMSF-25 AND AMSS-25

MODELOS AMSF-25 Y AMSS-25

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN Y SERVICIO PARA
LOS MODELOS AMSF-25 Y AMSS-25

MODÈLES AMSF-25 ET AMSS-25

INSTRUCTIONS DE MONTAGE ET D'ENTRETIEN POUR
LES MODÈLES AMSF-25 ET AMSS-25

Address all communications and shipments to:

Dirija todos la correspondencia y envíos a:
Adressez toutes les communiations et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR
MODELS AMSF-25 AND AMSS-25

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS, USERS AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

It is important to follow all instructions shipped with this product. This device is
to be installed by a trained electrician who is thoroughly familiar with the National
Electrical Code and will follow NEC Guidelines as well as local codes.

The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and the routing
of the wiring is to be accomplished under the direction of the facilities engineer and the
safety engineer. In addition, listed below are some other important safety instructions
and precautions you should follow:

• This is not a Listed safety device and is not intended to be used as such.

• Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this

equipment.

• Disconnect power before connecting or doing any maintenance on this

device.

• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may cause in
certain situations, permanent hearing loss. You should take appropriate
precautions such as wearing hearing protection.

• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may cause, in
certain situations, permanent hearing loss. The device should be
installed far enough away from potential listeners to limit their
exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of
Federal Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines which
may be used regarding permissible noise exposure levels.

• After testing is complete, provide a copy of this instruction sheet to all

operating personnel.

• Establish a procedure to routinely check the speaker installation for

integrity and proper operation. Any maintenance must be performed by
a trained electrician in accordance with NEC guidelines and local codes.

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property
damage, serious injury, or death to you or others.

A. Description.

The Federal Signal models AMSF-25 & AMSS-25 are heavy-duty, 8 ohm, round
speakers for use in public address or paging systems. These speakers are designed to
reproduce full-range voice communication. Both speakers are constructed of spun
aluminum. The speaker wiring connections are enclosed in a dust-tight and moisture-
proof, gasketed rear cover. All external surfaces are sealed with a metallic gray powder
coat paint.

-1-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 B. Specifications.

Frequency Response: 800 – 5k Hz

Power Handling: 25 Watts
Nominal Impedance: 8 ohms

AMSF-25 AMSS-25

Width: 7.25" (18.4 cm) 6.25" (15.9 cm)

Height: - 8.4" (21.3 cm)
Depth [without cover]: 4.1" (10.4 cm) 4.1" (10.4 cm)
Depth [with cover]: 5.0" (12.7 cm) 5.1" (12.9 cm)
Shipping Weight: 5.5 lbs. (2.7 kg) 6.0 lbs. (2.5 kg)

C. Unpacking.

After unpacking the unit , examine it for damage that may have occurred in
transit. If the equipment has been damaged, do not attempt to install or operate it. File
a claim immediately with the carrier stating the extent of the damage. Carefully check
all envelopes, shipping labels, and tags before removing or destroying them.

D. Mounting.

CAUTION

The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and the
routing of the wiring is to be accomplished under the direction of the facilities
and the safety engineer.

Model AMSF-25

Speaker model AMSF-25 is intended for flush mounting. There are six mounting
holes approximately 0.22" (5.6mm) in diameter in its outer flange. See figure 1. Install
the speaker behind a 6-1/8" (155.6 mm) hole. A small bead of silicone rtv around the
outer flange is recommended when installing this unit into a NEMA 4X rated enclo-
sure. Hardware for mounting the speaker shall be provided by the installer. The rear
cover (see figure 2) is equipped with a liquid-tight strain relief. This strain relief will
accommodate cable diameters between 0.18" (4.6mm) and 0.31" (7.9 mm). Securely
attach the cover to the speaker using the provided fasteners.

Model AMSS-25

Speaker model AMSS-25 is equipped with a serrated swivel mounting bracket

with a locking nut that allows the speaker to be adjusted through an angle of 90°. The
speaker mounting bracket is intended to be mounted on any relatively flat and rigid
surface. There are three mounting holes present in the base of the mount. See figure 3.
Hardware for mounting the speaker shall be provided by the installer. The rear cover
(see figure 2) is equipped with a liquid-tight strain relief. This strain relief will
accommodate cable diameters between 0.18" (4.6mm) and 0.31" (7.9 mm). Securely
attach the cover to the speaker using the provided fasteners.

-2-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WARNING

This unit is heavy and should be mounted on a rigid surface capable of

supporting the weight of the speaker.

E. Electrical Connections.

WARNING

Do not connect wires when power is applied.

Audio wires should be sized properly by your licensed installation electrician for
your service application. Connect the positive (+) audio line to the terminal with the
red indicator.

WARNING

This speaker is an 8-ohm device and should not be connected to a 25 VRMS

or a 70 VRMS line without the use of a step-down transformer. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in property damage, serious injury, or
death to you or others.

F. Service.

CAUTION

Any maintenance must be performed by a trained electrician in accordance

with NEC guidelines and local codes.

Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with
any problems that cannot be handled locally.

Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair must be
accompanied by a Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A can be obtained from the
local Distributor or Manufacturer’s Representative.

At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the
malfunction, should be given.

Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-3-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN Y SERVICIO PARA
LOS MODELOS AMSF-25 Y AMSS-25

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA LOS INSTALADORES,

USUARIOS Y PERSONAL DE MANTENIMIENTO

Es importante seguir todas las instrucciones incluidas con este producto. Esta
unidad debe ser instalada por un electricista bien adiestrado que conozca completamente
todos los requisitos del Código Eléctrico Nacional (NEC son las siglas en inglés) y que
siga las pautas del NEC y de los códigos locales.

La selección del lugar de montaje para esta unidad y sus controles, y de las rutas
para sus cables, deberá ser llevada a cabo bajo la dirección del ingeniero de planta y del
ingeniero de seguridad. Abajo se indican otras importantes instrucciones de seguridad y
precauciones que debe seguir:

• Esta no es una unidad clasificada como de seguridad y no se debe usar

como tal.

• Lea y entienda bien todas las instrucciones antes de instalar u operar este
equipo.

• Desconecte la electricidad antes instalar o hacer cualquier tipo de

mantenimiento en esta unidad.

• Todos los altoparlantes usados en este sistema de alarma producen

sonidos muy intensos que pueden causar, en ciertas situaciones, una
pérdida permanente del oído. Usted debe tomar precauciones apropiadas,
tales como usar protección para los oídos.

• Todos los altoparlantes usados en este sistema de alarma producen

sonidos muy intensos que pueden causar, en ciertas situaciones, una
pérdida permanente del oído. Esta unidad debe ser instalada
suficientemente lejos de las personas para limitar la exposición a los
ruidos intensos, pero manteniendo siempre la eficacia del sistema. La
norma de ruidos 1910.95 del Código de Reglas Federales de OSHA
contiene pautas que se deben usar para determinar los niveles permisibles
de exposición a sonidos intensos.

• Después de completar las pruebas, entregue una copia de esta hoja de

instrucciones a todo el personal de operación.

• Establezca un procedimiento para inspeccionar rutinariamente la

instalación de los altoparlantes, con el fin de asegurar su integridad y
funcionamiento correcto. Cualquier trabajo de mantenimiento se deberá
ejecutar por un electricista adiestrado y de acuerdo con las pautas del
NEC y de los códigos locales.

La falla en tomar todas las precauciones y seguir todas las instrucciones de

seguridad puede causar daños a la propiedad y lesiones serias, que pueden llegar hasta
la muerte de usted o de otras personas.

A. Descripción.

Los modelos AMSF-25 y AMSS-25 de Federal Signal son altoparlantes redondos con
una impedancia de 8 ohmios para servicio pesado, utilizados generalmente en servicios
de amplificación pública o de llamadas a personas. Estos altoparlantes han sido
diseñados para reproducir la gama completa de frecuencias usadas en la comunicación
por voz. Ambos altoparlantes son fabricados de aluminio centrifugado. Las conexiones
del altoparlante están contenidas bajo una cubierta, protegida contra el polvo y la
humedad por un empaque. Todas las superficies externas están selladas con una pintura
protectora de polvo de color gris metálico.

-4-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 B. Especificaciones.

Frecuencias de operación: 800 Hz - 5 kHz

Capacidad de potencia: 25 Vatios
Impedancia nominal: 8 ohmios

AMSF-25 AMSS-25

Anchura: 7,25" (18,4 cm) 6,25" (15,9 cm)

Altura: - 8,4" (21,3 cm)
Profundidad [sin cubierta]: 4,1" (10,4 cm) 4,1" (10,4 cm)
Profundidad [con cubierta]: 5,0" (12,7 cm) 5,1" (12,9 cm)
Peso de embarque: 5,5 lbs (2,7 kg) 6,0 lbs (2,5 kg)

C. Forma de desempacar la unidad.

Después de desempacar la unidad, examínela para ver si tiene algún daño ocurrido
durante el tránsito. Si el equipo se ha dañado, no trate de instalarlo ni de operarlo.
Presente una reclamación inmediatamente ante la compañía transportadora, indicando
la naturaleza y extensión del daño. Inspeccione cuidadosamente todos los sobres,
etiquetas y otros documentos de embarque antes de quitarlos del equipo o destruirlos.

D. Montaje.

PRECAUCIÓN

La selección del lugar de montaje para la unidad, sus controles y la ruta para
sus cables, deberá ser hecha bajo la dirección del ingeniero de planta y del
ingeniero de seguridad.

Modelo AMSF-25

El altoparlante modelo AMSF-25 ha sido diseñado para montaje al ras. El

altoparlante tiene seis agujeros de montaje de aproximadamente 0,22" (5,6 mm) de
diámetro en su borde exterior. Vea la Figura 1. Instale el altoparlante detrás de un
agujero de 6-1/8" (155,6 mm) de diámetro. Se recomienda aplicar una pequeña cantidad
de silicona rtv, alrededor del borde exterior, cuando se instale este altoparlante dentro de
una caja con clasificación NEMA 4X. Los herrajes necesarios para montar el altoparlante
deberán ser suministrados por el instalador. La cubierta exterior (vea la Figura 2) está
equipada con un dispositivo de alivio de tensión para el cable, que también evita la
entrada de líquidos. Este dispositivo puede acomodar cables con diámetros entre 0,18"
(4,6 mm) y 0,31" (7,9 mm). Instale la cubierta en forma segura al altoparlante, usando
los fijadores suministrados.

Modelo AMSS-25

El altoparlante modelo AMSS-25 está equipado con un brazo giratorio de montaje

que tiene una tuerca de presión y permite que el altoparlante pueda ser ajustado en un
ángulo de hasta 90°. El brazo de montaje del altoparlante se puede montar sobre
cualquier superficie rígida y relativamente plana. La base del brazo de montaje tiene
tres agujeros. Vea la Figura 3. Los herrajes necesarios para montar el altoparlante
deberán ser suministrados por el instalador. La cubierta exterior (vea la Figura 2) está
equipada con un dispositivo de alivio de tensión para el cable, que también evita la
entrada de líquidos. Este dispositivo puede acomodar cables con diámetros entre 0,18"
(4,6 mm) y 0,31" (7,9 mm). Instale la cubierta en forma segura al altoparlante, usando
los fijadores suministrados.

-5-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ADVERTENCIA

Esta unidad es pesada y se debe montar sobre una superficie rígida que sea
capaz de soportar el peso del altoparlante.

E. Conexiones eléctricas.

ADVERTENCIA

No conecte los alambres mientras la electricidad esté conectada.

Los alambres de audio deben tener un tamaño adecuado, que deberá ser
determinado por el electricista licenciado a cargo de la instalación, para el tipo
de servicio deseado. Conecte el alambre positivo (+) de audio al terminal que
tiene el indicador rojo.

ADVERTENCIA

Este altoparlante es una unidad de 8 ohmios y no debe ser conectado a una

línea de 25 Voltios r.m.s. o de 70 Voltios r.m.s. sin el uso de un transformador
reductor de voltaje. La falla en seguir estas instrucciones puede resultar en
daños a la propiedad, lesiones serias, o hasta la muerte para usted o para otras
personas.

F. Servicio.

PRECAUCIÓN

Cualquier trabajo de mantenimiento deberá ser llevado a cabo por un

electricista adiestrado de acuerdo con las pautas del NEC y los códigos
locales.

Federal Signal le dará servicio a su equipo o le suministrará asistencia técnica con

cualquier problema que no pueda ser resuelto localmente.

Cualquier unidad devuelta a Federal Service para recibir servicio, inspección o

reparación deberá estar acompañada de una Autorización para Devolución de Material
(R.M.A. son las siglas en inglés). Esta R.M.A. se puede obtener de su distribuidor local o
de un representante del fabricante.

Se deberá incluir una breve explicación del servicio solicitado o de la naturaleza del
problema.

Dirija todas las comunicaciones y embarques a:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division (División de productos eléctricos)
Service Department (Departamento de servicio)
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-6-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUCTIONS DE MONTAGE ET D'ENTRETIEN POUR
LES MODÈLES AMSF-25 ET AMSS-25

MESSAGE DE SÉCURITÉ AUX INSTALLATEURS, UTILISATEURS

ET PERSONNES CHARGÉES DE L'ENTRETIEN

Il est important de suivre toutes les instructions qui accompagnent ce produit. Ce

dispositif doit être installé par un électricien de métier qui connaît parfaitement le code
électrique national et doit suivre les directives du C.N.E. ainsi que les codes locaux en
vigueur.

Le choix de l'emplacement de montage de ce dispositif, de ses commandes et du

passage de câble doit être établi sous la direction de l'ingénieur de l'installation et de
l'ingénieur de la sécurité. En outre, il faut suivre les instructions de sécurité et les
précautions indiquées ci-dessous :

• Ceci n'est pas un dispositif de sécurité enregistré et il n'est pas censé être
employé comme tel.

• Il faut lire et comprendre toutes les instructions avant d'installer et de

faire fonctionner cet équipement.

• Coupez l'électricité avant de connecter ou de faire l'entretien de ce

dispositif.

• Tous les haut-parleurs de sécurité efficaces produisent des sons forts qui,
dans certaines situations, peuvent provoquer une surdité permanente. Il
faut prendre les précautions nécessaires comme le port de dispositif de
protection antibruit.

• Tous les haut-parleurs de sécurité efficaces produisent des sons forts qui,
dans certaines situations, peuvent provoquer une surdité permanente. Ce
dispositif doit être installé suffisamment loin des auditeurs possibles pour
limiter leur exposition tout en assurant le maintien de son efficacité. Le
code OSHA du règlement fédéral 1910.95 sur les normes antibruit donne
des directives qui peuvent être employées pour déterminer les niveaux
admissibles d'exposition au bruit.

• Une fois que les essais sont terminés, donnez une copie de cette feuille
d'instructions à tous les employés de service.

• Établissez une procédure pour vérifier régulièrement l'installation du

haut-parleur, son intégrité et son bon fonctionnement. Tout l'entretien doit
être effectué par un électricien de métier selon les directives de C.N.E. et
les codes locaux en vigueur.

Le non-respect des précautions et instructions de sécurité peut provoquer des

dégâts matériels, des blessures personnelles ou même de mort pour vous ou des tiers.

A. Description.

Les modèles AMSF-25 et AMSS-25 de Federal Signal sont des haut-parleurs ronds,
d'usage industriel, de 8 ohms, pour les systèmes de sonorisation ou d'annonce. Ces haut-
parleurs sont conçus pour reproduire toute la gamme des communications parlées. Tous
deux sont construits en aluminium repoussé. Toutes les connexions de câblage des haut-
parleurs sont placées dans un boîtier arrière avec joint étanche aux poussières et à
l'humidité. Toutes les surfaces extérieures sont scellées par de la peinture gris métallique
à revêtement poudré.

-7-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 B. Spécifications.

Caractéristiques de fréquence : 800 – 5k Hz

Puissance admissible 25 watts
Impédance nominale : 8 ohms

AMSF-25 AMSS-25

Largeur : 18,4 cm (7,25 po) 15,9 cm (6,25 po)

Hauteur : - 21,3 cm (8,4 po)
Profondeur [sans couvercle] : 10,4 cm (4,1 po) 10,4 cm (4,1 po)
Profondeur [sans couvercle] : 12,7 cm (5 po) 12,9 cm (5,1 po)
Pois brut : 2,5 kg (5,5 lb) 2,7 kg (6 lb)

C. Déballage.

Après le déballage, examinez l'unité et vérifiez qu'il n'y a pas eu de dégâts pendant
le transport. Si l'équipement a été endommagé, n'essayez pas de l'installer ou de le faire
fonctionner. Déposez une réclamation immédiatement auprès du transporteur indiquant
l'étendue des dégâts. Vérifiez attentivement toutes les enveloppes et étiquettes
d'expédition avant de les enlever et de les détruire.

D. Montage.

ATTENTION

Le choix de l'emplacement de montage de ce dispositif, de ses commandes et du

passage de câble doit être établi sous la direction de l'ingénieur de l'installation
et de l'ingénieur de la sécurité.

Modèle AMSF-25

Le haut-parleur AMSF-25 est destiné à un montage encastré. Il y a six trous de

montage d'un diamètre d'environ 5,6 mm (0,22 po) dans le rebord extérieur. Voir figure 1.
Installez le haut-parleur derrière un trou de 155,6 mm (6-1/8 po). Il est recommandé de
mettre un peu de silicone RTV sur le rebord extérieur si l'unité est installée dans un
coffret NEMA 4X. Le matériel de montage des haut-parleurs sera fourni par
l'installateur. Le couvercle arrière (voir figure 2) est équipé d'un serre-câble étanche. Ce
serre-câble convient pour des diamètres allant de 4,6 mm (0,18 po) à 7,9 mm (0,31 po).
Fixez bien le couvercle au haut-parleur à l'aide des attaches fournies.

Modèle AMSS-25

Le haut-parleur AMSS-25 est équipé d'un support de montage à rotule dentelée avec
un écrou de serrage qui permet d'ajuster le haut-parleur sur 90°. Le support de montage
du haut-parleur est destiné à être monté sur une surface relativement plate et rigide. Il y
a trois trous de montage dans la base du support. Voir figure 3. Le matériel de montage
des haut-parleurs sera fourni par l'installateur. Le couvercle arrière (voir figure 2) est
équipé d'un serre-câble étanche. Ce serre-câble convient pour des diamètres allant de
4,6 mm (0,18 po) à 7,9 mm (0,31 po). Fixez bien le couvercle au haut-parleur à l'aide des
attaches fournies.

-8-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MISE EN GARDE

Cette unité est lourde et doit être montée sur une surface rigide qui peut
supporter le poids du haut-parleurs.

E. Connexions électriques.

MISE EN GARDE

Ne connectez pas les fils sous tension.

Les fils audio doivent être d'une taille suffisante qui sera déterminée par
l'électricien de métier chargé de l'installation. Connectez le fil audio positif (+)
au terminal avec l'indicateur rouge.

MISE EN GARDE

Ce haut-parleur est un dispositif de 8 ohms et ne doit pas être connecté à un fil

de 25 ou 70 VRMS sans emploi d'un transformateur réducteur de tension. Le
non-respect des précautions et instructions de sécurité peut provoquer des
dégâts matériels, des blessures personnelles ou même de mort pour vous ou des
tiers.

F. Entretien.

ATTENTION

Tout l'entretien doit être effectué par un électricien de métier selon les
directives de C.N.E. et les codes locaux en vigueur.

Si vous avez des problèmes qui ne peuvent être résolus localement, Federal Signal
fera l'entretien de votre équipement et vous apportera une assistance technique.

Toutes les unités renvoyées à Federal Signal pour entretien, inspection ou

réparation doivent être accompagnées d'une autorisation de renvoi du matériel. Vous
pouvez obtenir cette autorisation auprès de votre distributeur local ou du représentant
du fabricant.

Il faudra donner une brève explication du service demandé ou de la nature de la

panne.

Envoyez toutes communications et expéditions à :

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-9-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1 MODEL AMSF-25
MODELO AMSF-25
MODELE AMSF-25 5.0" (127.0 mm)
4.1" (104.1 mm)

5.0"
(127.0 mm)

Ø 7.25"
(184.0mm)

Ø 6.63" (186.4 mm) Ø .22" (5.6 mm)

6X 290A4364

2 REAR COVER
CUBIERTA POSTERIOR
COUVERCLE ARRIÈRE

290A4365

-10-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 MODEL AMSS-25
MODELO AMSS-25
5.1" (129.5 mm)
MODELE AMSS-25
4.1" (104.0 mm)

8.40"
(213.4 mm)
Ø 6.25"
(158.8 mm)

4.94" (125.5 mm)

Ø.28" (7.1 mm)

1.75" 3X
(44.5 mm)
2.63"
(66.8 mm)

2.00"
(50.8 mm)
2.60"
(66.0 mm) 290A4366

2561769A
REV. A 1001
Printed in U.S.A.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MODEL AM30
INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR
MODEL AM30 SPEAKER

MODELO AM30
INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA INSTALACIÓN Y EL MANTENIMIENTO DEL
PARLANTE MODELO AM30

MODELE AM30
INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION ET D’ENTRETIEN OU RÉPARATION
POUR LE HAUT-PARLEUR DE MODÈLE AM30

Address all communications and shipments to:

Dirija todas la correspondencia y envíos a:
Adressez toutes les communiations et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL AM30 SPEAKER

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS, USERS AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

It is important to follow all instructions shipped with this product. This device is to be installed by a
trained electrician who is thoroughly familiar with the National Electrical Code and will follow NEC
Guidelines as well as local codes.
The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and the routing of the wiring is to
be accomplished under the direction of the facilities engineer and the safety engineer. In addition,
listed below are some other important safety instructions and precautions you should follow:
• This is not a Listed safety device and is not intended to be used as such.
• Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this equipment.
• Disconnect power before connecting or doing any maintenance on this device.
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may cause in certain situations,
permanent hearing loss. You should take appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing
protection.
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may cause, in certain situations,
permanent hearing loss. The device should be installed far enough away from potential listeners to
limit their exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal
Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines which may be used regarding permis-
sible noise exposure levels.
• After testing is complete, provide a copy of this instruction sheet to all operating personnel.
• Establish a procedure to routinely check the speaker installation for integrity and proper
operation. Any maintenance must be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with NEC
guidelines and local codes.
Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage, serious
injury, or death to you or others.

A. Description.
The Federal Signal Model AM30 is a conservatively rated 30-watt constant-directivity paging
projector for use in any public address or paging application.
The driver employs a rugged phenolic diaphragm, 1.5-inch diameter voice coil, and “rim
centered” ferrite magnet structure for long life and durability under extreme operating
conditions.
A 12-inch connecting cable, phased and color coded, is provided for connecting to the AM30.
A nominal 60° horizontal by 40° vertical coverage pattern together with a low-frequency cutoff
of 350 Hz provides excellent articulation in demanding applications.
The AM30 is molded from high-impact ultraviolet inhibiting ASA (acrylic styrene acryloni-
trile). A positive lock super tough nylon swivel base provides maximum mounting flexibility
and ease of installation.
Ideal for both indoor and outdoor applications, these drivers are well suited for any installation
requiring rugged, reliable performance.

B. Model AM30 Specifications.

Frequency Response: 400-6500Hz ±5 dB
Power Handling: 30 watts
Impedance:
Nominal 8 ohms
Minimum, above 500 Hz 6.5 ohms (650Hz)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sound Pressure Level @ 1 meter: 107 dB, 1 watt input averaged, pink noise
band-limited from 500 to 5000Hz
Horizontal Beamwidth: 60° @ 2.0 kHz
Vertical Beamwidth: 40° @ 2.0 kHz
Directivity Factor Rq (Q): 15.9 @ 2.0 kHz
Usable Low-Frequency Limit: 350 Hz
Construction: High-impact, acrylic styrene acrylonitrile
(ASA) with ultraviolet light inhibiting mesa
tan finish. Positive-lock super tough nylon
swivel base.
Weight:
Shipping 3.8 lbs. (1.7 kg)
Net 3.0 lbs. (1.4 kg)
Housing Dimensions:
Width 12.1" (30.7 cm)
Height 8.9" (22.6 cm)
Depth 12.2" (31.0 cm)
C. Unpacking.
After unpacking the Model AM30, examine it for damage that may have occurred in transit. If
the equipment has been damaged, do not attempt to install or operate it. File a claim immedi-
ately with the carrier stating the extent of the damage. Carefully check all envelopes, shipping
labels and tags before removing or destroying them.

D. Mounting.
CAUTION
The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and the routing of the wiring is to
be accomplished under the direction of the facilities and the safety engineer.

The speaker is intended to be mounted on any relatively flat and rigid surface. Hardware for
mounting the speaker to the surface is left up to the installer.
Mounting to wall, ceiling, or to electrical boxes is accomplished without the need of adding a
steel plate to the base. Bonding straps may be used for mounting to beams. Mounting holes in
the base should be knocked through as needed.
WARNING
This unit is heavy and should be mounted on a rigid surface capable of supporting the
weight of the speaker.
E. Electrical Connections.
WARNING
Do not connect wires when power is applied.
NOTE
Audio wires should be sized properly by your licensed installation electrician for your service
application. This cable requires a twisted shielded pair with an 18AWG minimum and should
produce no more than 15% signal loss over the length of the cable run.

Connect the positive (+) audio line to the white wire with the red indicator and the negative (-)
audio line to the white wire.
WARNING
This speaker is an 8-ohm device and should not be connected to a 25 VRMS or a 70 VRMS line
without the use of a step-down transformer. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in property damage, serious injury, or death to you or others.
-2-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 F. Service.
CAUTION
Any maintenance must be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with NEC guidelines and
local codes.
Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with any problems
that cannot be handled locally.
Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair must be accompanied by
a Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A can be obtained from the local Distributor or
Manufacturer’s Representative.
At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the malfunction, should
be given.
Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-3-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA INSTALACIÓN Y EL MANTENIMIENTO DEL PARLANTE
MODELO AM30

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA LOS INSTALADORES, USUARIOS Y PERSONAL

DE MANTENIMIENTO
Es importante seguir las instrucciones enviadas con este producto. Este dispositivo debe ser
instalado por un electricista calificado que esté familiarizado con el Código Nacional Eléctrico y siga
las instrucciones así como los códigos locales.
La selección del sitio de montaje del dispositivo, sus controles y la ruta de alambrado, se hará bajo la
dirección del Ingeniero de Facilidades y el Ingeniero de Seguridad. Sin embargo, a continuación se
listan algunas otras instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad que se deben seguir:
• Este no es un dispositivo de seguridad para área peligrosa y no fué creado para tal fin.
• Lea y comprenda todas las instrucciones antes de instalar u operar este equipo.
• Desconecte la energía antes de conectar o hacer cualquier mantenimiento a este dispositivo.
• Todos los parlantes de prevención efectivos producen sonidos fuertes, que pueden causar en
ciertas ocasiones, pérdida permanente del oído y se deben tomar las debidas precauciones tales
como usar protectores auditivos.
• Todos los parlantes de prevención efectivos producen sonidos fuertes, que pueden causar pérdida
permanente del oído. El dispositivo debe ser instalado bastante lejos de los oyentes potenciales
como para limitar su exposición. El código OSHA de Regulaciones Federales (EEUU) 1910.95
sobre el ruido, debe ser usado para establecer la permisibidad del nivel de exposición al ruido.
• Después de completar la prueba, entregue una copia de estas instrucciones a todo el personal de
operación.
• Establezca un procedimiento rutinario para probar la integridad y operación apropiada del
altoparlante. Cualquier mantenimiento debe ser realizado por un electricista entrenado siguiendo
las normas NEC y los códigos locales.
El no seguir de todas la instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad, puede provocar daños a la
propiedad, lesiones severas y aún su muerte o la de otros.

A. Descripción.
El Modelo AM30 de Federal Signal es una corneta para llamadas, de direccionalidad constante,
capaz de entregar 30-vatiosal minimo para llamadas o anuncios al público.
La parte activa usa un diafragma fenólico de trabajo pesado, bobina de 1,5" e imán de ferrita de
estructura de “corona centrada” para larga vida y durabilidad bajo condiciones de operación
extremas.
Un cable de 12", polarizado y marcado con colores, se provee para conectar al AM30.
Una cobertura nominal de 60° horizontal por 40° vertical junto con un corte de frecuencia a
350Hz da una excelente articulación en aplicaciones exigentes.
El AM30 es moldeado con ASA (estireno acrílico de acrilonitrilo) de alto impacto con
inhibición de rayos ultravioleta. Una base giratoria super fuerte de bloqueo positivo provee
máxima flexibilidad de montaje y facilidad de instalación.
Estas cornetas son ideales para uso en intemperie e interiores; convenientes para cualquier
aplicación que requiera un desempeño confiable de trabajo pesado.

B. Especificaciones del Modelo AM30.

Respuesta de frecuencia: 400-6500Hz aprox ±5dB
Potencia que maneja: 30vatios
-4-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Impedancia
Nominal 8 Ohm
Mínimo sobre 500 Hz 6,5 Ohm (650 Hz)
Nivel de presión de sonido @ a 1 metro: 107dB, 1 vatio entrada promedio, ruido
rosado limitado a la banda de 500 a
5000Hz
Angulo de cobertura horizontal: 60° @ 2,0kHz
Angulo de cobertura vertical: 40° @ 2,0kHz
Factor de direccionalidad Rq(Q): 15,9 @ 2,0kHz
Límite de baja frecuencia: 350Hz
Construcción: Estireno acrílico de acrilonitrilo (ASA)
de alto impacto, con inhibición a la luz
ultravioleta, acabado bronce de mesa
y base giratoria de nylon super fuerte de
bloqueo positivo.
Peso
De embarque 3,8 lbs (1,7kg)
Neto 3,0 lbs (1,4 kg)
Dimensiones de la caja
ancho 12,1" (30,7 cm)
alto 8,9" (22,6 cm)
profundidad 12,2" (31,0 cm)

C. Desempaque.
Después de desempacar la unidad AM30, examine cuidadosamente si hay daños de transporte.
Si hubo daños, no intente instalarla u operarla. Haga el reclamo inmediatamente al
transportador estableciendo el monto del daño. Revise con cuidado todas las envolturas, sellos
de embarque y etiquetas antes de removerlas o destruirlas.

D. Montaje.
PREVENCION
La selección del sitio de montaje del dispositivo, sus controles y la ruta de alambrado, se harán bajo
la dirección del Ingeniero de las Facilidades y del Ingeniero de Seguridad.

El parlante se montará en una superficie relativamente rígida y plana. El instalador suministrará

los soportes adecuados para el montaje del parlante en la superficie.
El montaje a pared, techo o cajas eléctricas, se hace sin necesidad de adicionar una placa de
acero a la base. Se pueden usar correas para el montaje a una viga. Se pueden hacer huecos de
montaje en la base, cuando sea necesario.
PRECAUCION
Esta unidad es pesada y debe ser montada en una superficie rígida capaz de soportar
el peso del parlante.

E. Conexiones Eléctricas.
PRECAUCION
No conecte cables cuando haya corriente eléctrica.
NOTA
Los cables de audio deben tener el tamaño correcto seleccionado por un electricista instalador
autorizado para su aplicación de servicio. Este cable requiere un par trenzado blindado con un cable
calibre 18AWG como mínimo y debe producir menos de 15% de pérdida de señal
a lo largo del tramo del cable.
-5-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Conecte la línea positiva de audio (+) al cable blanco con marca roja y la línea negativa de
audio (-) al cable blanco.
PRECAUCION
Este parlante es un aparato de 8 Ohm y no se debe conectar a una línea de 25 V RMS o de 70 V
RMS sin el uso de un transformador reductor. La falla en seguir estas instrucciones puede
acarrear daños a la propiedad, heridas serias, o su muerte o la de otros.

F. Servicio.
PREVENCION
Cualquier mantenimiento debe ser hecho por un electricista entrenado que esté familiarizado con
el NEC y siga sus instrucciones y los códigos locales.
Federal Signal le hará servicio a su equipo o proveerá asistencia técnica con cualquiera de los
problemas que no puedan ser manejados localmente.
Cualquier unidad que se devuelva a Federal Signal para servicio, inspección o reparación, debe
acompañarse de una autorización de “material devuelto” (R.M.A.). Esta R.M.A. se puede
obtener con el representante o distribuidor local del fabricante y se adjuntará una breve
explicación de la necesidad del servicio o la naturaleza del mal funcionamiento.
Dirija todas las comunicaciones y envíos a:
FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-6-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION ET D’ENTRETIEN OU RÉPARATION POUR LE
HAUT-PARLEUR DE MODÈLE AM30

MESSAGE DE SECURITE AUX INSTALLATEURS, UTILISATEURS ET PERSONNEL

D’ENTRETIEN
Il est important de respecter toutes les instructions expédiées avec ce produit. Ce dispositif doit être
installé par des électriciens professionnels qui sont complètement au courant du Code Electrique
National et respecteront les recommandations NEC ainsi que les codes locaux.
Le choix de l’endroit de montage du dispositif, de ses commandes et du passage des câbles doit être
effectué sous la direction de l’ingénieur des services électriques et de l’ingénieur de sécurité. De
plus, sont énumérées ci-dessous quelques autres instructions et précautions de sécurité
importantes que vous devez suivre:
• Ceci n’est pas un dispositif de sécurité classé et n’est pas destiné à être utilisé comme tel.
• Lire et comprendre toutes les instructions avant d’installer ou d’utiliser ce matériel.
• Déconnectez l’alimentation avant de connecter ou de faire de l’entretien sur ce dispositif.
• Tous les haut-parleurs effectifs d’avertissement produisent des sons puissants qui peuvent causer
dans certaines situations une perte permanente de l’ouïe. Vous devez prendre des précautions
appropriées comme le port de protection de l’ouïe.
• Tous les haut-parleurs d’avertissement effectifs produisent des sons forts qui peuvent causer dans
certaines situations la perte définitive de l’ouïe. Le dispositif doit être installé suffisamment loin
des auditeurs potentiels pour limiter leur exposition tout en maintenant son efficacité. Le code
OSHA de Federal Regulations 1910.95 (Norme de bruit) donne des recommandations qui peuvent
être utilisées concernant les niveaux d’exposition au bruit permis.
• Après fin de l’essai, donnez un exemplaire de cette feuille d’instructions à tout le personnel
utilisateur.
• Etablissez une procédure pour vérifier régulièrement le système sonore concernant son
actionnement et son fonctionnement. L’entretien doit être exécuté par un électricien professionnel
conformément aux recommandations NEC et aux codes locaux.
Si on ne respecte pas ces précautions de sécurité, il peut en résulter des dommages aux biens, des
blessures graves ou mortelles pour vous ou d’autres.

A. Description.
Le Modèle AM30 de Federal Signal est un cornet de sonorisation à facteur de directivité
constante de valeur nominale conservative 30 watts pour utilisation dans des applications de
sonorisation ou de recherche par haut-parleur.
Le driver utilise une membrane phénolique solide, une bobine vocale de diamètre 1,5" et une
structure magnétique en ferrite “centrée” pour permettre une longue durée et durabilité dans
des conditions de fonctionnement extrêmes.
Un câble phasé et codé en couleur 12" est prévu pour connecter au AM30.
Un mode nominal de couverture horizontal 60º et vertical 40º ainsi qu’une coupure basse
fréquence à 350Hz donne une articulation excellente pour des applications difficiles.
Le AM30 est moulé en ASA arrêtant les ultraviolets, résistant à de gros chocs (acrylique
styrène acrylonitrile). Une base pivotante en Nylon super-dure à verrouillage positif permet une
souplesse maximale de montage et facilite l’installation.
Idéal pour des applications intérieures et extérieures, ce cornet convient bien à toute application
nécessitant des performances solides et fiables.

B. Specifications du Modele AM30.

Réponse fréquence 400-6500Hz ±5 dB
-7-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Capacité en puissance 30 watts
Impédance:
Nominale 8 ohms
Minimale au-dessus de 500 Hz 6,5 ohms (650 Hz)
Niveau de pression acoustique @ 1 mètre: 107 dB, 1 watt d’entrée en moyenne,
limitation de bande bruit rose de 500
à 5000 Hz
Largeur de faisceau horizontal 60° @ 2,0 kHz
Largeur de faisceau vertical 40° @ 2,0 kHz
Facteur directif Rq (Q) 15,9 @ 2,0 kHz
Limite utilisable basse fréquence: 350Hz
Construction: ASA (acrylique styrène acrylonitrile) à
résistance élevée aux chocs avec arrêt des
rayons ultraviolets, à finition mesa tan.
Base à pivot Nylon, super solide à
verrouillage positif.
Poids:
Expédition 3,8 lbs (1,7 kg)
Net 3,0 lbs (1,4 kg)
Dimensions du carter:
Largeur 12,1" (30,7 cm)
Hauteur 8,9" (22,6 cm)
Profondeur 12,2" (31,0 cm)
C. Deballage.
Après déballage du Modèle AM30, inspectez-le pour voir s’il a été endommagé pendant le
transport. S’il a été endommagé, faites une déclaration immédiatement auprès du transporteur
en indiquant les dommages. Vérifiez soigneusement toutes les enveloppes, les étiquettes
d’expédition et les étiquettes volantes avant de les retirer ou les détruire.
D. Montage.
ATTENTION
La sélection de l’endroit de montage du dispositif, de ses commandes et du passage des câbles doit
être effectuée sous la direction de l’ingénieur des services électriques et l’ingénieur de sécurité.
Le haut-parleur est destiné à être monté sur une surface relativement plate et rigide. La
quincaillerie pour le montage du haut-parleur sur la surface est sous la responsabilité de
l’installateur.
Le montage sur mur, plafond, ou sur boàtiers électriques est fait sans besoin d’ajouter une
plaque d’acier à la base. Des pattes de fixation peuvent être utilisées pour montage sur des
poutres. Des trous de montage dans la base doivent être chassés selon besoin.
AVERTISSEMENT
Cette unité est lourde et doit être montée sur une surface rigide capable de supporter
le poids du haut-parleur.
E. Connexions Electriques.
AVERTISSEMENT
Ne connectez pas les fils si la tension n’est pas coupée.
NOTE
Les fils audio doivent être choisis par votre électricien d’installation agréé pour votre application de
service. Ce câble exige une paire de fils torsadés et blindés d’un mimum de 18AWG et devrait
produire au plus une perte de signal de 15% sur la longueur du câble.
-8-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connectez la ligne positive audio (+) au fil blanc avec indicateur rouge et la ligne audio
négative (-) au fil bleu.
AVERTISSEMENT
Le haut-parleur est un dispositif de 8 ohms et ne doit pas être connecté à une ligne 25 VRMS ou à 70
VRMS sans utiliser un transformateur abaisseur de tension. Si ces instructions ne sont pas
suivies, il peut en résulter des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles
pour vous ou d’autres.

F. Service.
ATTENTION
Tout entretien doit être exécuté par un électricien entraàné conformément aux recommandations
NEC et aux codes locaux.
L’usine de Federal Signal fera le service de votre matériel et fournira une assistance technique
pour tout problème qui ne puisse être traité localement.
Toutes les unités renvoyées à Federal Signal pour un service, inspection ou réparation doivent
être accompagnées d’une autorisation de retour de matériel. Cette R.M.A. peut être obtenue
auprès du distributeur local ou du représentant du fabricant.
A ce moment, une courte explication du service demandé, ou la nature du mauvais
fonctionnement doit être donnée.
Adressez toutes les communications et expéditions à:
FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-9-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2561150F
REV. F Printed 6/03
Printed in U.S.A.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION 2561188B
Electrical Products Division REV. B 4/00
Printed in U.S.A.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
MODEL AM302 and AM302GCX AUDIOMASTER® SPEAKER

WARNING levels. The speaker projector is adjustable and may be reposi-

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in tioned to obtain desired sound distribution.
property damage, serious injury, or death to you or others. The AM302GCX is suitable for use in Class I, Groups A, B, C, &
SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS D, Division 2; Class II, Groups F & G, Division 2; and Class III
Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
Peoples lives depend on your safe installation of our products. It is
important to follow all instructions shipped with the products. This II. SPECIFICATIONS.
device is to be installed by a trained electrician who is thoroughly
Operating Voltage 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms
familiar with the National Electric Code and will follow the NEC
guidelines as well as local codes. Power Input (selectable) 7 W, 15 W, and 30 W
Weight (approx.) 7 lb. (3.2kg)
The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls
and routing of the wiring is to be accomplished under the direction Size 14" (356mm) high, 10" (254mm)
of the Facilities Engineer and the Safety Engineer. In addition, listed wide, 11" (279mm) deep.
below are some other important safety instructions and precautions Construction Aluminum enclosure painted
you should follow: with grey electrostatic powder
• Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating coating. Amplifier housing
this equipment. sealed with neoprene rubber
• This unit must be installed by a qualified electrician in accordance gasket.
with National and local Electrical Codes, under the direction of
the authority having jurisdiction. Audibility information is shown in table 1.
• Do not connect this unit to the system when power is on.
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may III. INSTALLATION.
cause, in certain situations, permanent hearing loss. You should A.Unpacking.
take appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing protection.
After unpacking the speaker, examine it carefully for possible
• After installation, test the sound system to ensure proper opera- damage that may have occurred in transit. If equipment has
tion. been damaged, immediately file a claim with the carrier stating
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may extent of damage. Carefully check all shipping labels and tags
cause, in certain situations, permanent hearing loss. The device for special instructions before removing or destroying them.
should be installed far enough away from potential listeners to
limit their exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The B. Mounting Arrangements (see figure 1).
OSHA Code of Federal Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard CAUTION
provides guidelines which may be used regarding permissible To maintain the hazardous location rating of the Model
noise exposure levels. AM302GCX, do not use the 7/8" knockout (concealed conduit
• Show these instructions to your Safety Engineer and then file mounting).
them in a safe place and refer to them when maintaining and/or
The speaker can be mounted on any relatively flat surface.
reinstalling the unit.
Conduit connection can be made to 1/2" threaded opening at
• After installation and completion of initial system test, a program bottom of housing or to 7/8" knockout in rear of housing. After
for periodic testing of this device must be established. Refer to the the mounting location and mounting method have been
authority having jurisdiction for this information. selected, proceed with the applicable instructions below.
• Consult the authority having jurisdiction in your area regarding
the proper use and installation of this product.
POWER SOUND LEVEL dB(A)
I. GENERAL.
TAP @ 10' on axis
The AudioMaster Model AM302 and AM302GCX are 25 Vrms
7 watt 104
and 70 Vrms, indoor/outdoor rated, selectable power output (7 to
30 watts) loudspeakers for use with general utility signaling 15 watt 109
systems such as Federal Signal’s SelecTone system. They are 30 watt 112
designed to reproduce electronically generated warning tones,
which command rapid recognition, and full range voice communi- Table 1. Power Tap Settings vx. Sound Output on Models AM302 and
AM302GCX
cation. They are suitable for use in areas with high ambient noise

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A" C" A" C"
MODEL
AM302

MODEL
AM302GCX
B" B"

COLLAR COLLAR
NUT NUT
5-5/8" 5-5/8"
2-3/4" 3-1/4"
2-1/4"

.201" DIA. 2 HOLES .201" DIA. 4 HOLES

1-13/16" (MOUNTING) (MOUNTING)
2-9/16" 13/16" INCHES MM 13/16"
5"
1/2-14 NPT A 10" 254 1/2-14 NPT
3-3/8" 5-1/2" 3-3/8"
7/8" DIA. CONCEALED CONDUIT KNOCK OUT B 15" 381
MOUNTING(IN REAR OF HOUSING) C 11" 279
290A2627-76B

Figure 1. Models AM302 and AM302GCX Speaker Dimensions.

WARNING f. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph 4 in

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if an section C, Electrical Connections, and make the necessary
accumulation of water, snow, dust, etc. resides in the speaker electrical connections.
projector, severely reducing or preventing operation of this device.
2. Model AM302 Concealed Conduit Mounting.
Mount the unit so speaker projector is pointed horizontally
or slightly downward. a. Remove and retain the two screws that secure cover to
housing. Remove the cover.
1. Flat Surface Mounting.
b. Remove the 7/8" knockout at rear of housing.
a. Remove and retain the two screws that secure cover to
c. Install the conduit connection.
housing. Remove the cover.
NOTE
WARNING
If installation on an existing electrical box is desired, an optional
Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if any objects
Model CC adapter plate is required.
are in front of speaker, severely reducing optimum sound
distribution. For maximum effectiveness, ensure that the d. Select the mounting location and place rear of housing
front of the speaker is clear of obstructions. against mounting surface.
b. Select the mounting location and place rear of housing e. Using the two (2) mounting holes as a template, scribe
against mounting surface. drill position marks on the mounting surface. See figure 1
for mounting hole locations and dimensions.
c. Using the mounting holes (two (2) inside the Model
AM302’s housing or four (4) in the AM302GCX’s CAUTION
external mounting bracket) as a template, scribe drill Before drilling holes in any surface, ensure that both sides of surface
position marks on the mounting surface. See figure 1 for are clear of items that could be damaged.
mounting hole locations and dimensions.
f. Secure the unit to the mounting surface with #10 screws
CAUTION appropriate for the type of mounting surface material.
Before drilling holes in any surface, ensure that both sides of surface
WARNING
are clear of items that could be damaged.
Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the
d. Secure the unit to the mounting surface with #10 screws projector is mishandled during installation or over time. DO NOT
appropriate for the type of mounting surface material. rotate the projector more than 180 degrees or internal speaker
wiring may be damaged.
WARNING
Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the g. Reposition speaker projector if necessary to obtain desired
projector is mishandled during installation or over time. DO NOT sound coverage. Loosen collar nut (see figure 1) and move
rotate the projector more than 180 degrees or internal speaker projector to desired position.
wiring may be damaged. h. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph 4 in
e. Reposition speaker projector if necessary to obtain desired section C, Electrical Connections, and make the necessary
sound coverage. Loosen collar nut (see figure 1) and move electrical connections.
projector to desired position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 C.Electrical Connections. NOTE
DANGER Only three (3) of the five (5) wattage terminals marked on the
To avoid electrical shock, do not connect wires when terminal block are for use on the AM302 and AM302GCX.
circuits are energized. For proper operation, the speaker wire should be connected to one
(1) of these terminals as indicated in figure 3. The remaining two
WARNING (2) wattage terminals are not used.
Audio wires should be sized properly by your licensed installation
electrician for your service application. This cable requires a twisted 4. Be sure the neoprene rubber cover gasket is properly seated
shielded pair with an 18AWG minimum and should produce no in the housing groove and reinstall the housing cover.
more than 15% signal loss over the length of the cable run. WARNING
Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the housing
National Electrical Code as well as local codes must be adhered
is not closed properly. To reduce the possibility of explosion,
to in installation of these models. All electrical wiring must be
the Model AM302GCX’s housing cover must be kept tight
routed through approved conduit and fittings.
while circuits are energized.
1. See figures 2 and 3. Connect the audio common (-) leads to
the speaker’s common terminal. IV. TESTING/OPERATING.
2. Refer to figures 2 and 3. Connect the audio positive (+) leads WARNING
to the 25V or 70V terminal, depending on the external signal Under certain conditions these devices are capable of producing
source voltage. sounds loud enough to cause hearing damage. Adequate hearing
3. The AM302 and AM302GCX are factory configured for 30 protection should be worn if standing within close proximity to
W operation. If a different wattage terminal is desired, device while testing. Recommendations in the OSHA Sound Level
remove the wire leading to the speaker from the terminal Standard (29 CFR 1910) should not be exceeded.
marked 30 W and connect it to the terminal marked 7 W or A.After installation is complete, be sure to test the system to
15 W as indicated in figure 3. verify that each speaker operates satisfactorily. If it is found
that the unit is too loud for its location, a lower wattage tap may
SPEAKER MODELS be selected. Carefully remove the housing cover and move the
AM302 speaker internal yellow lead to a lower wattage tap (see Figure
& 3). Reinstall the housing cover and retest.
AM302GCX
WARNING
Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the housing
is not closed properly. To reduce the possibility of explosion,
the Model AM302GCX’s housing cover must be kept tight while
circuits are energized.
B. After completion of initial system test, establish a program for
periodic testing of this device. Refer to the authority having
jurisdiction for this information.
C. Provide a copy of these instructions for the Safety Engineer,
system operator(s) and maintenance personnel.
SAFETY MESSAGE TO OPERATORS
Even if your warning system is operating properly, it may not be
completely effective. People may not hear or heed your warning
+ RED + RED + RED
signal. You must recognize this fact and ensure that your warning
- BLK - BLK - BLK signal achieves its intended effect through proper test/training
sequences within your specific application(s).

25 OR 70 VRMS
SPEAKER
SIGNAL SOURCE

290A2627-75C

Figure 2. Typical Installation Wiring.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THESE TWO WATTAGE TERMINALS ARE NOT USED.

NOTE: LETTERS APPEAR ON THIS SIDE OF TERMINAL STRIP. SHOWN

HERE ON MOUNTING BRACKET FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

COM

15W

30W

15W

30W
25V

70V

7W
* * *
SPEAKER INTERNAL YELLOW LEAD TO BE CONNECTED TO 1 OF 3
AVAILABLE WATTAGE TERMINALS INDICATED BY " ".
*

YEL

POSITIVE (+) LEADS TO 25 OR 70 VOLT TERMINAL, DEPENDING

UPON EXTERNAL SIGNAL SOURCE VOLTAGE.

COMMON (-) LEADS TO COMMON TERMINAL.

290A2627-74

Figure 3. Internal Multi-tap Wiring Set-up.

V. MAINTENANCE. B. Testing should be periodically performed. Refer to the authority

SAFETY MESSAGE TO MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL having jurisdiction for information.

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result C. In the event a volume adjustment or other repair is required, be
in property damage, serious injury, or death to you or others. sure to refer to the Safety Message For Maintenance Personnel
before proceeding.
• Read and understand all instructions before performing mainte-
nance on this unit. VI. SERVICE.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, or ignition of hazardous WARNING
atmospheres, do not perform maintenance or service on this unit Unauthorized repair/servicing of the unit may result in degradation
when circuits are energized. of performance and/or property damage, serious injury, or death to
• Periodic checks should be made to ensure that effectiveness of you or others. If a malfunctioning unit is encountered, do not
this device has not been reduced because speaker has become attempt any field repair/retrofit of parts.
clogged with a foreign substance or because objects have been
placed in front of the speaker. Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical
assistance with any problems that cannot be handled locally.
• Any maintenance to this unit MUST be performed by a trained
electrician in accordance with NEC guidelines and local codes. Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or
repair, must be accompanied by a Return Material Authorization.
• Never alter this unit in any manner. Safety in hazardous locations
This R.M.A. can be obtained from the local Distributor or
may be jeopardized if additional openings or alterations are made
Manufacturer’s Representative.
to Model AM302GCX.
• The nameplates, which contain cautionary or other information of At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the
importance to maintenance personnel, should not be obscured if nature of the malfunction, should be given.
exterior of device is painted. Address all communications and shipments to:

A.Periodically check this device to verify that there are no foreign FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
substances in, or in front of, the speaker which will reduce its Electrical Products Division
effectiveness. Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MODEL AM100D
INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR
MODEL AM100D DRIVER

MODELO AM100D
INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA INSTALACIÓN Y EL MANTENIMIENTO DEL
EXCITADOR MODELO AM100D

MODÈLE AM100D
INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION ET D’ENTRETIEN POUR LE
MODÈLE DE COMMANDE AM100D

Address all communications and shipments to:

Dirija toda la correspondencia y todos los envíos a:
Adressez toutes les communications et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL AM100D DRIVER

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS, USERS AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

It is important to follow all instructions shipped with this product. This device is to be installed by a
trained electrician who is thoroughly familiar with the National Electrical Code and will follow NEC
Guidelines as well as local codes.
The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and the routing of the wiring is to
be accomplished under the direction of the facilities engineer and the safety engineer. In addition,
listed below are some other important safety instructions and precautions you should follow:
• This is not a Listed safety device and is not intended to be used as such.
• Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this equipment.
• Do not connect this unit to the system while the power is on.
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may cause in certain situations,
permanent hearing loss. You should take appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing
protection.
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may cause, in certain situations,
permanent hearing loss. The device should be installed far enough away from potential listeners to
limit their exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal
Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines which may be used regarding permis-
sible noise exposure levels.
• After installation, test the sound system to ensure proper operation.
• After testing is complete, provide a copy of this instruction sheet to all operating personnel.
• Establish a procedure to routinely check the speaker installation for integrity and proper
operation. Any maintenance must be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with NEC
guidelines and local codes.
Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage, serious
injury, or death to you or others.

A. Description.
The Federal Signal Model AM100D is a heavy-duty, 100-watt, compression driver for use in
high-power public address installations.
The exterior is finished in durable, weatherproof paint and all metal parts have been tropical-
ized for resistance to high-humidity and fungus.
Ideal for both indoor and outdoor applications, these drivers are well suited for any installation
requiring rugged, high-power performance.

B. Model AM100D Specification.

Power Handling: 100 watts
Impedance:
Nominal 8 ohms
Sound Pressure Level @ 1 meter: 130 dBa*
Sound Pressure Level @ 10': 120 dBa*
Frequency Response: 300 - 3000 Hz
Construction: Rugged die cast housing with weatherproof
finish for outdoor use.
Mechanical Connection of Driver: 1-3/8"-18 thread, 1/2" long
* Pink noise band-limited from 400 to 4000 Hz using AM100H Horn.

-1-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Weight:
Shipping 5.0 lbs.
Net 4.3 lbs.
Dimensions:
Diameter 4.66"
Height 2.82"
Recommended Horn: AM100H

C. Unpacking.
After unpacking the Model AM100D, examine it for damage that may have occurred in transit.
If the equipment has been damaged, do not attempt to install or operate it. File a claim
immediately with the carrier stating the extent of the damage. Carefully check all envelopes,
shipping labels and tags before removing or destroying them.

D. Installation.
1. Position the supplied washer in the throat of the horn.
2. Screw the driver into the horn.
WARNING
This unit is heavy and should be mounted on a rigid surface capable of supporting the weight
of the speaker.
3. Install the horn/driver assembly in intended location, referring to the instructions provided
with the horn.
4. Route the speaker wiring to the horn/driver assembly.
WARNING
Do not connect wires when power is applied.
5. Connect the speaker wiring to the speaker wire leads.
CAUTION
When connecting multiple speakers, polarity MUST be maintained. Ensure that all red wires are
connected to the same audio output lead, and that all black wires are connected
to the same audio output lead.

E. Service.
CAUTION
Any maintenance must be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with
NEC guidelines and local codes.
Do not perform maintenance on this device while the system power is on.
Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with any problems
that cannot be handled locally.
Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair must be accompanied by
a Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A can be obtained from the local Distributor or
Manufacturer’s Representative.
At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the malfunction,
should be given.
Address all communications and shipments to:
FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-2-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA INSTALACIÓN Y EL MANTENIMIENTO DEL
EXCITADOR MODELO AM100D

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA INSTALADORES, USUARIOS Y PERSONAL DE

MANTENIMIENTO
Es importante seguir todas las instrucciones que vienen con este producto. Este dispositivo debe ser instalado
por un electricista capacitado que conozca perfectamente el Código Eléctrico Nacional y siga todas las
Directrices del Código NEC así como los códigos locales.
La selección del lugar de montaje para el dispositivo, sus controles y la distribución del cableado debe realizarse
bajo la dirección del ingeniero de planta y el ingeniero de seguridad. Además, a continuación indicamos
algunas otras instrucciones importantes y precauciones de seguridad que usted debe seguir:
• Este dispositivo no es un aparato aprobado de seguridad y no debe usarse como tal.
• Lea y comprenda todas las instrucciones antes de instalar o poner a funcionar este equipo.
• No conecte esta unidad al sistema mientras esté recibiendo energía eléctrica.
• Todos los altavoces eficaces de alarma producen sonidos fuertes que pueden causar, en ciertas situaciones,
la pérdida permanente de la audición. Usted debe tomar las precauciones apropiadas como, por ejemplo,
usar protección para los oídos.
• Todos los altavoces eficaces de alarma producen sonidos fuertes que pueden causar, en ciertas situaciones,
la pérdida permanente de la audición. Este dispositivo debe instalarse a suficiente distancia de los posibles
escuchantes para limitar su exposición sin perder por ello su eficacia. El Código de Reglamentos Federales
de la OSHA en su Norma sobre ruidos 1910.95 estipula las directrices que pueden aplicarse respecto a los
niveles admisibles de exposición al ruido.
• Después de la instalación, pruebe el sistema de sonido para asegurarse de que funcione correctamente.
• Después de completar estas pruebas, entregue una copia de este pliego de instrucciones a todo el personal
operativo.
• Establezca un procedimiento para revisar, como tarea de rutina, la instalación del altavoz para verificar su
integridad y su correcto funcionamiento. Todas las tareas de mantenimiento deben ser realizadas por un
electricista capacitado conforme a las directrices del Código NEC y los códigos locales.
Si no se siguen todas las precauciones e instrucciones de seguridad pueden ocurrir daños materiales, graves
lesiones o la muerte para usted u otras personas.

A. Descripción
El Excitador Modelo AM100D de Federal Signal es un excitador de compresión de 100 W para trabajos
pesados que puede usarse en instalaciones de sistemas de megafonía pública de gran potencia.
El exterior de este dispositivo tiene un acabado con duradera pintura a prueba de intemperie y todas las
piezas metálicas han sido tropicalizadas para lograr una mayor resistencia a condiciones de gran humedad
y al ataque de los hongos.
Estos excitadores son ideales tanto para aplicaciones bajo techo como al aire libre y son muy apropiados
para cualquier instalación que requiera un funcionamiento resistente de gran potencia.

B. Especificaciones del Modelo AM100D

Consumo de energía eléctrica: 100 W
Impedancia:
Capacidad nominal 8 ohmios
Nivel de presión del sonido a 1 metro: 130 dBa*
Nivel de presión del sonido a 10 pies ( 3 metros): 120 dBa*
Respuesta de frecuencia: 300-3000 Hz
Construcción: Resistente caja fundida al troquel con acabado a
prueba de intemperies para el uso al aire libre.
Conexión mecánica del excitador: 1-3/8 pulg. rosca 18, 1/2 pulg. de largo
* Banda rosada de ruido - Limitada de 400 a 4000 Hz usando una bocina AM100H.

-3-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Peso:
Peso de envío 5.0 libras (2.25 kg)
Peso neto 4.3 libras (1.93 kg)
Dimensiones:
Diámetro 4.66 pulg. (118 mm)
Altura 2.82 pulg. (71 mm)
Bocina recomendada: AM100H

C. Desembalaje
Después de desembalar el Excitador Modelo AM100D, examínelo para detectar cualquier daño que
pueda haber ocurrido durante su transporte. Si el equipo está dañado, no intente instalarlo ni ponerlo a
funcionar. Presente inmediatamente una reclamación ante el transportista indicando la extensión de los
daños. Revise cuidadosamente todos los sobres, etiquetas de envío y rótulos antes de retirarlos o
destruirlos.

D. Instalación.
1. Coloque la arandela provista en el cuello de la bocina.
2. Enrosque el excitador en la bocina.
ADVERTENCIA
Esta unidad es pesada y debe montarse sobre una superficie
rígida capaz de soportar el peso del altavoz.
3. Instale el conjunto de bocina/excitador en el lugar previsto, consultando las instrucciones que
vienen con la bocina.
4. Distribuya el cableado del altavoz llevándolo al conjunto bocina/excitador.
ADVERTENCIA
No conecte los cables mientras el sistema esté recibiendo energía eléctrica.
5. Conecte el cableado del altavoz a los conductores del altavoz.
CUIDADO
Al conectar múltiples altavoces, se DEBE MANTENER la polaridad. Asegúrese de que todos los cables
rojos se conecten al mismo conductor de salida de audio y que todos los cables negros se conecten al
mismo conductor de salida de audio.

E. Mantenimiento
CUIDADO
Todas las tareas de mantenimiento deben ser realizadas por un electricista capacitado
conforme a las directrices del Código NEC y los códigos locales.
No realice trabajos de mantenimiento en este dispositivo mientras el sistema esté recibiendo energía
eléctrica.

Federal Signal reparará su equipo o le prestará asistencia técnica con cualquier problema que no pueda
corregirse localmente.
Todas las unidades devueltas a Federal Signal para su mantenimiento, inspección o reparación deben
venir acompañadas de una Autorización de Devolución de Materiales. (RMA, por sus siglas en inglés).
Esta RMA puede obtenerse de su distribuidor local o del representante del fabricante.
En ese momento se le pedirá una breve explicación del servicio solicitado o la naturaleza del desperfecto.
Dirija toda su correspondencia y todos sus envíos a:
FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
Electrical Products División
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-4-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION ET D’ENTRETIEN POUR
LE MODÈLE DE COMMANDE AMl00D

MESSAGE DE SÉCURITÉ POUR LES INSTALLATEURS, LES UTILISATEURS ET LE

PERSONNEL RESPONSABLE DE L’ENTRETIEN.
Il est important de suivre toutes les instructions expédiées avec ce produit. Ce dispositif doit être installé
par un électricien bien formé qui connaît le Code national de l’électricité (NEC) et qui respecte toutes les
directives du NEC ainsi que les codes locaux.
Le choix de l’emplacement de montage de ce dispositif, ses contrôles et l’acheminement du câblage
doivent se faire sous la direction de l’ingénieur de l’installation et l’ingénieur responsable de la sécurité. En
outre, vous trouverez ci-après une liste de certaines instructions et précautions de sécurité importantes à
suivre :
• Ceci n’est pas un dispositif de sécurité homologué et n’est donc pas prévu à cet effet en termes
d’utilisation.
• Lisez et comprenez toutes les instructions avant d’installer ou de faire fonctionner cet équipement.
• Ne connectez pas l’appareil au système si le courant n’est pas coupé.
• Tous les haut-parleurs d’avertissement efficaces produisent des sons forts qui peuvent causer, dans
certains cas, des pertes auditives permanentes. Vous devriez prendre les précautions appropriées comme
par exemple le port de protection auditive.
• Tous les haut-parleurs d’avertissement efficaces produisent des sons forts qui peuvent causer, dans
certains cas, des pertes auditives permanentes. L’appareil doit être installé assez loin des auditeurs que
possible pour limiter leur exposition tout en conservant son efficacité. La norme de bruit 1910.95 des
règlements du code fédéral de la OSHA (Code of Federal Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard) offre
des directives à utiliser pour les niveaux d’exposition au bruit admissible.
• Après l’installation, testez le système sonore pour vous assurer de son bon fonctionnement.
• Après le test, fournissez une copie de ce feuillet d’instructions à tout le personnel d’opération.
• Établissez une procédure de vérification de routine de l’installation du haut-parleur pour vérifier son
intégrité et son bon fonctionnement. Tout entretien doit être effectué par un électricien formé
conformément aux codes locaux et aux directives du code national de l’électricité.
Le non-respect de toutes les précautions de sécurité et instructions peut mener à des dommages à la
propriété, des blessures graves ou la mort pour vous ou pour d’autres.

A. Description.
Le modèle AMl00D de Federal Signal est une commande à compression à usage industriel de 100 watts,
que l’on peut utiliser dans des installations de diffusion publique à haute puissance.
L’extérieur est fini d’une peinture durable à l’épreuve des intempéries et toutes les pièces métalliques
ont été climatisées pour les tropiques afin d’assurer une résistance à un haut degré d’humidité et aux
champignons.
Modèle idéal pour les applications à l’intérieur et à l’extérieur, ces commandes conviennent
particulièrement pour toute installation exigeant une performance robuste et à haute puissance.

B. Spécifications du modèle AMl00D.

Puissance admissible : 100 watts
Impédance :
Nominale 8 ohms
Niveau de pression acoustique @ 1 mètre : 130 dBa*
Niveau de pression acoustique @ 10 pi : 120 dBa*
Réponse en fréquence : 300 - 3 000 Hz
Construction : Boîtier robuste matricé au fini à l’épreuve
des intempéries pour une utilisation à l’extérieur.
Connexion mécanique de la commande : l 3/8 po (3,49 cm) -18 pas, l/2 po (1,27 cm)
de longueur
* Bruit rose à largeur de bande limitée de 400 à 4 000 Hz en utilisant l’avertisseur sonore AMl00H.

-5-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Poids :
Expédition 5,0 lb (2,268 kg).
Net 4,3 lb (2,68 kg)
Dimensions :
Diamètre 4,66 po (11,83 cm)
Hauteur 2,82 po (7,26 cm)
Avertisseur sonore recommandé : AMl00H

C. Déballage.
Après avoir déballé le modèle AM100D, examinez-le pour tout signe de dommages qui auraient pu
apparaître en transit. Si l’appareil est endommagé, n’essayez pas de l’installer ou de le faire
fonctionner. Déposez immédiatement une réclamation auprès du transporteur indiquant la portée des
dommages. Vérifiez attentivement toutes les enveloppes, les étiquettes d’expédition et les étiquettes
avant de les retirer ou de les détruire.

D. Installation.
1. Positionnez la rondelle fournie dans la gorge de l’avertisseur sonore.
2. Vissez la commande dans l’avertisseur sonore.
AVERTISSEMENT
Cette unité est lourde et devrait être montée sur une surface rigide capable de supporter le poids
du haut-parleur.

3. Installez l’assemblage de l’avertisseur sonore/commande à l’endroit choisi en vous reportant aux

instructions fournies avec l’avertisseur.

4. Acheminez les fils du haut-parleur jusqu’à l’assemblage de l’avertisseur sonore/commande.

AVERTISSEMENT
Ne connectez pas les fils lorsque l’appareil est sous tension.

5. Connectez les fils du haut-parleur aux fils de sortie du haut-parleur.

MISE EN GARDE
Lorsqu’on connecte des haut-parleurs multiples, on DOIT respecter la polarité. Assurez-vous que tous
les fils rouges sont connectés au même fil de sortie audio, et que tous les fils noirs sont
connectés au même fil de sortie audio.

E. Réparation.
MISE EN GARDE
Tout entretien doit être effectué par un électricien formé conformément aux codes locaux et aux
directives du code national de l’électricité.
Ne faites pas l’entretien de cet appareil si le circuit est sous tension.
Federal Signal réparera votre équipement ou fournira une aide technique pour tout problème qui ne
peut être solutionné localement.
Tous les appareils retournés à Federal Signal pour réparation, inspection ou entretien doivent être
accompagnés d’une autorisation de retour du matériel. Cette autorisation s’obtient du distributeur
local ou du représentant du fabricant.
Il faudrait aussi joindre une brève explication du service demandé ou de la nature de la défaillance.
Adressez toutes les communications et les expéditions à :
FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-6-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2561754A
REV. A 901
Printed in U.S.A.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MODEL AM100H
INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR
MODEL AM100H HORN

MODELO AM100H
INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACION Y SERVICIO PARA BOCINA
MODELO AM100H

MODELE AM100H
INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION ET DE MAINTENANCE POUR
L’AVERTISSEUR SONORE MODELE AM100H

Address all communications and shipments to:

Dirija todos la correspondencia y envíos a:
Adressez toutes les communiations et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL AM100H HORN

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS, USERS AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

It is important to follow all instructions shipped with this product. This device is to be installed by a
trained electrician who is thoroughly familiar with the National Electrical Code and will follow NEC
Guidelines as well as local codes.
The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and the routing of the wiring is to
be accomplished under the direction of the facilities engineer and the safety engineer. In addition,
listed below are some other important safety instructions and precautions you should follow:
• This is not a Listed safety device and is not intended to be used as such.
• Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this equipment.
• Do not install this device while the system power is on.
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may cause in certain situations,
permanent hearing loss. You should take appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing
protection.
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may cause, in certain situations,
permanent hearing loss. The device should be installed far enough away from potential listeners to
limit their exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal
Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines which may be used regarding permis-
sible noise exposure levels.
• After testing is complete, provide a copy of this instruction sheet to all operating personnel.
• Establish a procedure to routinely check the speaker installation for integrity and proper
operation. Any maintenance must be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with NEC
guidelines and local codes.
Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage, serious
injury, or death to you or others.

A. Description.
The Federal Signal Model AM100H is a wide-angle horn for use in public address, paging, and
voice warning systems.
The AM100H is constructed from a Moplen polymer with a self-colored grey finish. A
positive-lock “U” mounting bracket is provided for maximum mounting flexibility and ease of
installation.

B. Model AM100H Specifications.

Cut-off Frequency: 300Hz
Construction: The horn is molded in grey Moplen
Mechanical Connection of Driver: Threaded metal throat insert to accommo-
date a screw-in driver with a throat opening of
0.7-inch to 1.0-inch diameter and a standard
1-3/8" thread
Weight:
Shipping 6 lbs.
Net 4 lbs. 10 oz.
Housing Dimensions:
Width 19.56"
Height 11.50"
Depth 22.31"
Recommended Driver: AM100D

-1-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 C. Unpacking.
After unpacking the Model AM100H, examine it for damage that may have occurred in transit.
If the equipment has been damaged, do not attempt to install or operate it. File a claim
immediately with the carrier stating the extent of the damage. Carefully check all envelopes,
shipping labels and tags before removing or destroying them.
D. Mounting.
CAUTION
The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and the routing of the wiring is to
be accomplished under the direction of the facilities and the safety engineer.
The speaker is intended to be mounted on any relatively flat and rigid surface. Hardware for
mounting the speaker to the surface is left up to the installer.
WARNING
This unit is heavy and should be mounted on a rigid surface capable of supporting the weight
of the speaker.
NOTE
Position the supplied washer in the throat of the horn before installing the driver
E. Electrical Connections.
Refer to the instructions packed with the compression driver (AM100D recommended).
F. Service.
CAUTION
Any maintenance must be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with NEC guidelines and
local codes.
Do not perform maintenance on this device while the system power is on.
Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with any problems
that cannot be handled locally.
Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair must be accompanied by
a Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A can be obtained from the local Distributor or
Manufacturer’s Representative.
At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the malfunction,
should be given.
Address all communications and shipments to:
FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-2-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACION Y SERVICIO PARA BOCINA MODELO AM100H

MENSAJE SOBRE SEGURIDAD PARA INSTALADORES, USUARIOS Y PERSONAL

DE MANTENIMIENTO
Es importante seguir todas las instrucciones enviadas con los productos. Este dispositivo ha de ser instalado
por un electricista capacitado que conozca plenamente las Normas para Instalaciones Eléctricas de los
EE.UU. y siga las Directrices de las Normas para Instalaciones Eléctricas de los EE.UU. como así también
las normas locales.
La selección del lugar de montaje para el dispositivo, sus mandos y el recorrido de los cables han de ser
realizados bajo la dirección del Ingeniero de Servicios y el Ingeniero de Seguridad. Además, a continuación
se enumeran otras instrucciones importantes de seguridad y precauciones que debería tomar:
• Éste no es un dispositivo enumerado de seguridad y no está diseñado para su uso como tal.
• Lea y entienda todas las instrucciones antes de instalar o accionar este equipo.
• No instale este dispositivo mientras el sistema esté recibiendo energía eléctrica.
• Todos los altavoces de aviso efectivos producen sonidos fuertes que, en ciertas situaciones, pueden
causar la pérdida permanente de la audición. Debería tomar precauciones apropiadas tales como llevar
protección auditiva.
• Todos los altavoces de aviso efectivos producen sonidos fuertes que, en ciertas situaciones, pueden
causar la pérdida permanente de la audición. El dispositivo debería ser instalado lo suficientemente
alejado de posibles oyentes para limitar su exposición mientras se mantiene todavía su efectividad. La
Norma de Ruido 1910.95 del Código OSHA de Reglamentaciones Federales provee directrices que
pueden ser usadas con relación a niveles permisibles de exposición a los ruidos.
• Después de terminar la comprobación, suministre una copia de esta hoja de instrucciones a todo el
personal operativo.
• Establezca un procedimiento para verificar rutinariamente la integridad y el funcionamiento correcto del
altavoz Todo mantenimiento debe ser realizado por un electricista capacitado en conformidad con las
directrices de las Normas para Instalaciones Eléctricas de los EE.UU. y las normas locales.
Si no se siguen todas las precauciones e instrucciones de seguridad, pueden causarse daños a la propiedad,
heridas graves o la muerte suya o de terceros.
A. Descripción.
El Modelo AM100H de Federal Signal es una bocina de gran angular para uso en sistemas de
altavoces, búsqueda de personas y aviso por voz.
El AM100H está construido con un polímero Moplen con un acabado gris autocoloreado. Se provee
un soporte de montaje de trabado eficaz en “U” para máxima flexibilidad de montado y fácil
instalación.
B. Modelo AM100H Especificaciones.
Frecuencia de cierre: 300Hz
Construcción: La bocina está moldeada en Moplen gris
Conexión mecánica del excitador: Inserción de boca metálica roscada para
alojar un excitador atornillable con una
abertura de boca de 0,7 pulgadas a 1,0
pulgada de diámetro y una rosca estándar de
1-3/8" pulgadas
Peso:
Envío 6 libras (2,7 Kg)
Neto 4 libras 10 onzas (2,227 Kg)
Dimensiones del alojamiento:
Ancho 19,56" (49,68 cm)
Alto 11,50" (29,21 cm)
Profundidad 22,31" (56,67 cm)
Excitador recomendado: AM100D

-3-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 C. Desembalaje.
Después de desembalar Modelo AM100H, examínelo cuidadosamente por daños posibles que pueden
haber ocurrido en tránsito. Si el equipo ha sido dañado, presente una reclamación inmediatamente
con el transportista indicando el grado de daño. Verifique cuidadosamente todas las etiquetas y
rótulos de envío por instrucciones especiales antes de quitarlos o destruirlos.

D. Montaje.
CUIDADO
La selección del lugar de montaje para el dispositivo, sus mandos y el recorrido de los cables ha de ser
lograda bajo la dirección de los ingenieros de servicios y seguridad.

El altavoz está diseñado para ser montado sobre cualquier superficie relativamente plana y rígida.
Los accesorios para montar el altavoz en la superficie corren por cuenta del instalador.
AVISO
Esta unidad es pesada y debería ser montada sobre una superficie rígida capaz de sustentar el peso del
altavoz.

NOTA
Coloque la arandela provista en el cuello de la bocina antes de instalar el excitador.

E. Conexiones Eléctricas.
Consulte las instrucciones empacadas con el excitador de compresión (se recomienda AM100D).

F. Servicio.
CUIDADO
Todas las tareas de mantenimiento deben ser realizadas por un electricista capacitado
conforme a las directrices del Código NEC y los códigos locales.
No realice trabajos de mantenimiento en este dispositivo mientras el sistema
esté recibiendo energía eléctrica.
Federal Signal reparará su equipo o brindará asesoramiento técnico para cualquier problema que no
pueda ser manejado localmente.
Toda unidad regresada a Federal Signal para servicio, inspección o reparación debe ir acompañada de
una Autorización de Regreso de Material (R.M.A.). Esta R.M.A. puede ser obtenida del Distribuidor
o del Representante local del Fabricante.
En dicho momento, debería proveerse una breve explicación del servicio solicitado, o de la
naturaleza del desperfecto.
Todas las comunicaciones y envíos deberían dirigirse a:
FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-4-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION ET DE MAINTENANCE POUR L’AVERTISSEUR
SONORE MODELE AM100H
MESSAGE DE SECURITE DESTINE AUX INSTALLATEURS, AUX UTILISATEURS
ET AU PERSONNEL DE MAINTENANCE
Il est important de suivre toutes les instructions expédiées avec les produits. Cet appareil doit être installé
par un électricien qualifié et qui est familier avec le Code Electrique National et qui suit aussi bien les
Directives NEC (Code électrique national) que les codes locaux.
La sélection de l’emplacement de support pour cet appareil, ses commandes et le chemin de câblage doit
être effectuée sous la responsabilité de l’ingénieur des installations et l’ingénieur de la sécurité. En
complément, quelques autres consignes et mesures de sécurité importantes que vous devriez suivre sont
listées ci-dessous:
• Ce n’est pas un appareil listé de sécurité et ne devra pas être utilisé comme tel.
• Lire et comprendre toutes les instructions avant d’installer et de faire fonctionner cet équipement.
• N’installez pas cet appareil lorsque le système est sous tension.
• Tous les haut-parleurs efficaces produisent des sons importants qui peuvent causer, dans certaines
situations, une perte permanente de l’ouïe. Vous devez prendre les précautions nécessaires, comme par
exemple, porter des protections appropriées.
• Tous les haut-parleurs efficaces produisent des sons importants qui peuvent causer, dans certaines
situations, une perte permanente de l’ouïe. Cet appareil doit être installé assez loin de personnes
auditrices éventuelles afin de limiter leurs expositions tout en conservant l’efficacité du haut-parleur. Le
Code de Réglementations Fédérales OSHA 1910.95 concernant la Norme de Bruit fournit des directives
qui peuvent être utilisées en ce qui concerne les niveaux permis d’exposition au bruit.
• Une fois que le test est fini, donner une copie de cette fiche d’instruction à tout le personnel.
• Etablir une procédure afin de vérifier de façon routinière l’installation correcte et le bon fonctionnement
du haut-parleur. Toute maintenance devra être exécutée par un électricien qualifié en conformité avec les
directives NEC et les codes locaux.
Le non-respect de toutes les instructions et les consignes de sécurité peut conduire à des dégâts sur les
équipements, de sérieuses blessures ou votre mort ou celle des autres.
A. Description.
Le modèle Federal Signal AM100H est un avertisseur sonore à grand angle utilisé pour les
communications au public, l’appel et les systèmes d’avertissement sonores.
L’AM100H est fabriqué à partir de polymère Mopeln avec un fini de couleur grise. Un support de
montage en forme de U à verrouillage positif est livré avec l’appareil pour assurer une flexibilité de
montage et une installation facile.
B. Specifications du Modele AM100H.
Fréquence de coupure: 300Hz
Construction: L’avertisseur sonore est moulé en Moplen gris
Connexion mécanique de l’entraînement: Un insert de gorge en métal fileté pour pouvoir
être utiliser un entraînement vissé avec une
ouverture de gorge de 0,7 pouce à 1 pouce de
diamètre avec un filetage standard de 1-3/8"
Poids:
A l’expédition 6 livres
Net 4 livres 10 onces
Dimension du boîtier:
Largeur: 19,56"
Hauteur: 11,50"
Profondeur: 22,31"
Entraîneur recommandé: AM100D

-5-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 C. Deballage.
Après avoir déballé le Modèle AM100H , l’examiner avec minutie afin de voir s’il a été endommagée
pendant le transport. Si l’équipement a subi des dégâts, remplir une demande de réclamation
immédiatement avec le transporteur rapportant l’étendue des dégâts. Vérifier avec précaution toutes
les enveloppes, les étiquettes et les bandes de marquage d’expédition avant de les ôter ou de les jeter.

D. Montage.
PRECAUTION
La sélection de l’emplacement de support pour cet appareil, ses commandes et le chemin de câblage doit
être effectuée sous la responsabilité de l’ingénieur des installations et l’ingénieur de la sécurité.

Le haut-parleur devra être monté sur une surface relativement plate et rigide. Le choix du matériel
pour le montage du haut-parleur est laissé à l’installateur.
AVERTISSEMENT
Cette unité est lourde et devra être montée sur une surface rigide capable de supporter le poids du haut-
parleur.

REMARQUE
Positionnez la rondelle fournie dans la gorge de l’avertisseur sonore avant d’installer la commande.

E. Connexion Electriques.
Se reporter aux instructions qui sont fournies avec entraînement de compression (AM100D est
recommandée).
F. Service.
MISE EN GARDE
Tout entretien doit être effectué par un électricien formé conformément aux codes locaux et aux directives
du code national de l’électricité.
Ne faites pas l’entretien de cet appareil si le circuit est sous tension.
L’usine Federal assurera le service de votre équipement ou fournira une assistance technique sur tous
les problèmes qui ne peuvent pas être résolus localement.
Toutes les unités renvoyées à Federal Signal pour un service, une inspection ou une réparation
doivent être accompagnées par une Notification de retour de matériel (R.M.A.). Cette R.M.A. peut
être obtenue auprès du distributeur local ou du représentant du fabricant.
Une telle notification devra indiquer clairement une courte description du service requis et donner
toutes les informations importantes concernant la nature du mauvais fonctionnement.
Adresser toutes les communications et les expéditions à:
FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-6-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2561755A
REV. A 901
Printed in U.S.A.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MODEL A15-EL
ELECTRONIC MEGAPHONE
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MODEL A15-EL
ELECTRONIC MEGAPHONE
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

A. GENERAL.

• Caution – Amplified sound or howling may cause damage to a person’s ears.

Do not use this megaphone at or near a person’s ears.
• When the megaphone is not in use for a long period of time, remove the
batteries and store separately.
• Do not place your megaphone in strong sunlight or near a heater for an
extended period of time.
• When cleaning the megaphone body, only use a neutral detergent. Never use
thinner or benzene.

B. UNPACKING.

After unpacking the A15-EL Megaphone, examine it carefully for possible damage
that may have occurred in transit. If it has been damaged, immediately file a claim
with the carrier stating the extent of damage. Carefully check all shipping labels and
tags for special instructions before removing or destroying them.

C. SPECIFICATIONS.

Power Output Rated: 10W Maximum: 16W

Power Consumption Below 16W (at rated output)
Effective Distance Approx. 825 ft. (250m)
Power Source SUM-2 (size C or R-14) dry cell (Alkaline) batteries
Power Duration Approximately 6 hours
Microphone Anti-howling, dynamic type (combined to main body)
Horn Diameter 7.88 in (200mm)
Total Length 13.88 in (340mm)
Weight Approx. 2.86 lb ; 1.3 kg (without batteries)

D. BATTERY INSERTION.

1. Open the back cover by releasing the cover latch (see figure 1).

2. Place six (6) C-size Alkaline batteries into the unit according to the polarity
indication shown on the inside wall (see figure 1).

E. OPERATION.

WARNING

Your hearing and the hearing of others, close to the electronic megaphone,
could be damaged by loud sounds. This can occur from short exposures to
very loud sounds, or from longer exposures to moderately loud sounds. For
hearing conservation guidance, refer to federal, state, or local recommenda-
tions. OSHA Standard 1910.95 offers guidance on “Permissible Noise
Exposure.”
-1-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. To activate the megaphone press the trigger switch on the grip.

2. When using the megaphone, place your lips as close as possible to the mouth
piece. Adjust the volume control to a range where there is no howling feedback when
in use (see figure 1).

F. SERVICE.

The Federal factory will service your megaphone or provide technical assistance
with any problem that cannot be handled locally.

Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair must be
accompanied by a Return Material Authorization. This RMA can be obtained from the
local Distributor or Manufacturer’s Representative. At this time a brief explanation of
the service requested, or the nature of the malfunction should be provided. Address all
communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL. 60466-3195

1
LATCH

POLARITY INDICATION
(INSIDE WALL)

MICROPHONE

TRANSI
STOR
MOUTHPIECE
IZED M
EGAP
HONE

1 0
2
VOL
SHOULDER
TRIGGER BELT
SWITCH VOLUME
CONTROL

SPEAKER

GRIP
290A4136

-2-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2561676A
REV. A 10/00
Printed in U.S.A.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 AUDIOMASTER®
EXPLOSION-PROOF-SPEAKERS

MODEL AM15XD1
INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS

Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR
MODEL AM15XD1

WARNING

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in

property damage, serious injury, or death to you or others.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS

Peoples lives depend on your safe installation of our products. It is important to follow all instruc-
tions shipped with the products. This device is to be installed by a trained electrician who is
thoroughly familiar with the National Electric Code and will follow the NEC guidelines as well as
local codes.
The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and routing of the wiring is to be
accomplished under the direction of the Facilities Engineer and the Safety Engineer. In addition,
listed below are some other important safety instructions and precautions you should follow:
• Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this equipment.
• This unit must be installed by a qualified electrician in accordance with NFPA72, and National
and local Electrical and Fire Codes, under the direction of the authority having jurisdiction.
• Do not connect this unit to the system when power is on.
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may cause, in certain situations,
permanent hearing loss. You should take appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing
protection.
• After installation, test the sound system to ensure proper operation.
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may cause, in certain situations,
permanent hearing loss. The device should be installed far enough away from potential listeners
to limit their exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal
Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines which may be used regarding
permissible noise exposure levels.
• Show these instructions to your Safety Engineer and then file them in a safe place and refer to
them when maintaining and/or reinstalling the unit.
• After installation and completion of initial system test, a program for
periodic testing of this device must be established. Refer to the authority having jurisdiction for
this information.
• Consult the authority having jurisdiction in your area regarding the proper use and installation of
this product.

A. GENERAL.
The AudioMaster Model AM15XD1 is an indoor/outdoor, 15 watt, hazardous location
loudspeaker for use with general signaling systems such as Federal Signal’s FS.COMMS™ or
SelectFone® systems. This model is suitable for use in NEC Class I, Groups B, C, & D;
hazardous locations; and in areas with high ambient noise levels. It is designed to
reproduce electronically generated warning tones, which command rapid recognition, and full
range voice communication. An adjustable mounting bracket is provided to allow positioning
for desired sound coverage.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 B. SPECIFICATIONS.
Operating 12.8 Vrms Max
Voltage
Impedence 11 Ohm
Power Input 15 W Max
Weight 15 lb. (6.8 kg)
(approx.)
Size 14.75" (375mm) long, 14.75" (375mm) high,
8.875" (225mm) wide.
Construction Aluminum enclosure and adjustable
steel mounting bracket painted with
grey enamel.
Approval Agency Listings:
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Guides UGKZ and UGKZ7

C. INSTALLATION.
1. Unpacking.
After unpacking the speaker, examine it carefully for possible damage that may have
occurred in transit. If equipment has been damaged, immediately file a claim with the carrier
stating the extent of the damage. Carefully check all shipping labels and tags for special
instructions before removing or destroying them.

2. Mounting Arrangements.
The speaker can be mounted on any relatively flat surface. Conduit connection can be made
to the 1/2" threaded opening at bottom of the housing (see figure 1).

WARNING
Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if an accumulation of water, snow, dust,
etc. resides in the speaker projector, severely
reducing or preventing operation of this device. Mount the unit
so speaker projector is pointed horizontally
or slightly downward.

a. Remove the two 1/2-13 hex head bolts, flat washers and lockwashers that secure
mounting bracket to unit.
b. Select mounting location.
WARNING
Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if any objects are
in front of speaker, severely reducing optimum sound distribution.
For maximum effectiveness, ensure that the front of
the speaker is clear of obstructions.

c. Using the mounting bracket as a template, scribe drill position marks on the mounting
surface. See figure 1 for mounting hole locations and dimensions.
CAUTION
Before drilling holes in any surface, be sure both sides of surface
are clear of anything that could be damaged.

d. Drill holes at the previously scribed drill position marks to

accommodate 1/2" diameter screws.

-2-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 e. Secure bracket to mounting surface with 1/2" diameter screws
appropriate for the type of mounting surface material.
f. Remove eight 5/16-18 x 1-3/4" hex head bolts, lockwashers and hex nuts that secure
cover to housing and carefully lift off cover.

WARNING
Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if the machined sealing surfaces are
damaged on this product. To maintain the
effectiveness of the explosion-proof enclosure, be careful
to avoid damaging the machined sealing
surfaces of cover and housing.

g. Reattach unit to its mounting bracket with two 1/2-13 hex head bolts, flat washers and
lockwashers previously removed. Position speaker so as to obtain desired sound coverage
then tighten these bolts securely.
h. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph d in section 3, Electrical Connec-
tions, and make the necessary connections.

3. Electrical Connections.
DANGER
To avoid electrical shock, do not connect wires when
circuits are energized.

National Electrical Code, as well as local codes, must be followed during installation of
these models. All electrical wiring must be routed through conduit and fittings approved for
explosion-proof installations. The use of metal conduit and fittings is required to provide
grounding of the enclosure.
WARNING
Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if suitable barriers are not provided for
explosive gases and other atmospheres. To reduce
the possibility of explosion when this unit is used in Class I, Group B atmospheres, the conduit
MUST have a sealing fitting within
18-inches of the enclosure. Be sure to refer to the National
Electrical Code or the authorities having
jurisdiction in your area.

a. Connect the audio common leads (-) to the speaker’s common terminal (marked (–)) and
audio positive (+) leads to the (+) SIG terminal (see figures 2 and 3).
WARNING
An uninsulated section of a single conductor must NOT be looped around a terminal and used
as two separate connections. NFPA 72 requires
that the wire is severed to provide electrical supervision
of the connection.

b. Carefully reinstall housing cover using eight 5/16-18 x 1-3/4" hex head bolts,
lockwashers and hex nuts that were previously removed. Verify that all housing and
mounting bolts have been securely tightened.

WARNING
Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if the housing is not closed properly. To
reduce possibility of explosion, housing cover
must be kept tight (all eight bolts fully tightened)
while circuits are energized.
-3-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 D. TESTING/OPERATING.
WARNING
Under certain conditions these devices are capable of producing sounds loud enough to cause
hearing damage. Adequate hearing protection
should be worn if standing within close proximity to device
while testing. Recommendations in the OSHA Sound
Level Standard (29 CFR 1910) should
not be exceeded.

1. After installation is complete, be sure to test the system to verify that each speaker operates
satisfactorily. Reinstall the housing cover.

WARNING
Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if the housing is not closed properly. To
reduce possibility of explosion, housing cover
must be kept tight (all eight bolts fully tightened) while
circuits are energized.

2. After completion of initial system test, establish a program for periodic testing of this
device. Refer to NFPA72G, local Fire Codes and the authority having jurisdiction for this
information.
3. Provide a copy of these instructions for the Safety Engineer, system operator(s) and
maintenance personnel.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO OPERATORS

Even if your warning system is operating properly, it may not be
completely effective. People may not hear or heed your warning
signal. You must recognize this fact and ensure that your
warning signal achieves its intended effect through
proper test/training sequences within
your specific application(s).

E. MAINTENANCE.
SAFETY MESSAGE TO MAINTENANCE
PERSONNEL
Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage, serious
injury, or death to you or others.
• Read and understand all instructions before performing maintenance
on this unit.
• Do not perform maintenance on this unit when circuits are energized.
• Periodic checks should be made to ensure that effectiveness of this device has not been reduced
because speaker has become clogged with a foreign substance or because objects have been
placed in front of the speaker.
• Any maintenance to this unit MUST be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with
NEC guidelines and local codes.
• Never alter this unit in any manner. Safety in hazardous locations may be jeopardized if additional
openings or alterations are made to this device.
• The nameplates, which contain cautionary or other information of importance to maintenance
personnel, should not be obscured if exterior of device is painted.

-4-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WARNING
Effectiveness of explosion-proof enclosure must be
maintained. Use caution to avoid damaging machined surfaces.

1. Periodically check this device to verify that there are no foreign substances in, or in front of,
the speaker which will reduce its effectiveness.
2. Testing should be periodically performed. Refer to NFPA 72G, local Fire Codes and the
authority having jurisdiction for information.
3. In the event a volume adjustment or other repair is required, be sure to refer to the Safety
Message For Maintenance Personnel before
proceeding.

F. Service.
WARNING
Unauthorized repair/servicing of the unit may result in degradation of
performance and/or property damage, serious injury, or death to you
or others. If a malfunctioning unit is encountered, do not attempt
any field repair/retrofit of parts.

Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with any problems
that cannot be handled locally.
Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair, must be accompanied by
a Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A. can be obtained from the local Distributor or
Manufacturer’s Representative.
At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the malfunction,
should be given.
Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division
Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

-5-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

C
B
E

PIPE

-6-
D THREAD

I DIA. H H
3 HOLES G
A F

A B C D E F G H I

14.75 in. 14.75 in. 8.312 in. 0.500 in. 8.375 in. 8.875 in. 4.500 in. 2.500 in. 0.531 in.
37.5 cm. 37.5 cm. 21.1 cm. 12 mm. 21.3 cm. 22.5 cm. 11.4 cm. 6.35 cm. 13 mm.
290A3830-01
 2 SPEAKER
MODEL
AM15XD1

SPEAKER + RED
SIGNAL SOURCE
- BLK

290A3830-02

3
FIELD COMMON (-) LEADS TO
COMMON TERMINAL.

COM(-)

SIG(+) FIELD POSITIVE (+) LEADS TO (+)

TERMINAL.

SPEAKER INTERNAL GREEN OR RED

LEAD TO BE CONNECTED TO (SIG)
TERMINAL.

290A3830-03

2561544B
REV. B 400
Printed in U.S.A.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2561545B
REV. B 400
Printed in U.S.A.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
MODEL AM30XD1 AUDIOMASTER®
EXPLOSION-PROOF SPEAKER

WARNING A.General.
Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may The AudioMaster Model AM30XD1 is an indoor/
result in property damage, serious injury, outdoor hazardous location loudspeaker for use with
or death to you or others. general utility signaling systems such as Federal Signal’s
FS.COMMS™ and SelectFone® systems. This model is
SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS suitable for use in NEC Class I, Groups B, C, & D;
Peoples lives depend on your safe installation of our hazardous locations; and in areas with high ambient
products. It is important to follow all instructions shipped noise levels. It is designed to reproduce electronically
with the products. This device is to be installed by a trained generated warning tones, which command rapid recogni-
electrician who is thoroughly familiar with the National tion, and full range voice communication. An adjustable
Electric Code and will follow the NEC guidelines as well as mounting bracket is provided to allow positioning for
local codes. desired sound coverage.
The selection of the mounting location for the device, B.Specifications.
its controls and routing of the wiring is to be accomplished Operating 18.2 Vrms Max
under the direction of the Facilities Engineer and the Safety Voltage
Engineer. In addition, listed below are some other important Impedence 11 Ohm
safety instructions and precautions you should follow: Power Input 30 W Max
• Read and understand all instructions before installing or Weight 23 lb. (10.5kg)
operating this equipment. (approx.)
• This unit must be installed by a qualified electrician in Size 20.75" (527mm) long,
accordance with National and local Electrical Codes,
18.56" (471mm) high, 16.375"
under the direction of the authority having jurisdiction.
(416mm) wide.
• Do not connect this unit to the system when power is on.
Construction Aluminum enclosure and adjustable
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which
steel mounting bracket painted with
may cause , in certain situations, permanent hearing loss.
grey enamel.
You should take appropriate precautions such as wearing
hearing protection. Approval Agency Listings:
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Guides UGKZ and
• After installation, test the sound system to ensure proper
UGKZ7
operation.
• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds,
which may cause, in certain situations, permanent hearing C.Installation.
loss. The device should be installed far enough away from
1. Unpacking.
potential listeners to limit their exposure while still
maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal After unpacking the speaker, examine it carefully for
Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines possible damage that may have occurred in transit.
which may be used regarding permissible noise exposure If equipment has been damaged, immediately file a
levels. claim with the carrier stating the extent of the damage.
• Show these instructions to your Safety Engineer and then Carefully check all shipping labels and tags for special
file them in a safe place and refer to them when maintain- instructions before removing or destroying them.
ing and/or reinstalling the unit.
• After installation and completion of initial system test, a 2. Mounting Arrangements.
program for periodic testing of this device must be The speaker can be mounted on any relatively flat
established. Refer to the authority having jurisdiction for
surface. Conduit connection can be made to the 1/2"
this information.
threaded opening at bottom of the housing (see figure
• Consult the authority having jurisdiction in your area 1).
regarding the proper use and installation of this product.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WARNING WARNING
Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if an Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if the
accumulation of water, snow, dust, etc. resides in the speaker machined sealing surfaces are damaged on this product. To
projector, severely reducing or preventing operation of this maintain the effectiveness of the explosion-proof enclosure,
device. Mount the unit so speaker projector is pointed be careful to avoid damaging the machined sealing
horizontally or slightly downward. surfaces of cover and housing.

a. Remove the two 1/2-13 hex head bolts, flat washers g. Reattach unit to its mounting bracket with two 1/2-
and lockwashers that secure mounting bracket to 13 hex head bolts, flat washers and lockwashers
unit. previously removed. Position speaker so as to obtain
b. Select mounting location. desired sound coverage then tighten these bolts
securely.
WARNING
h. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph
Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if any
d in section 3, Electrical Connections, and make the
objects are in front of speaker, severely reducing optimum
necessary connections.
sound distribution. For maximum effectiveness, ensure that
the front of the speaker is clear of obstructions. 3. Electrical Connections.
c. Using the mounting bracket as a template, scribe DANGER
drill position marks on the mounting surface. See To avoid electrical shock, do not connect wires when
figure 1 for mounting hole locations and dimensions. circuits are energized.
CAUTION National Electrical Code, as well as local codes, must
Before drilling holes in any surface, be sure both sides of be followed during installation of these models. All
surface are clear of anything that could be damaged. electrical wiring must be routed through conduit and
fittings approved for explosion-proof installations.
d. Drill holes at the previously scribed drill position The use of metal conduit and fittings is required to
marks to accommodate 1/2" diameter screws. provide grounding of the enclosure.
e. Secure bracket to mounting surface with 1/2"
WARNING
diameter screws appropriate for the type of Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if
mounting surface material. suitable barriers are not provided for explosive gases and
f. Remove eight 5/16-18 x 1-3/4" hex head bolts, other atmospheres. To reduce the possibility of explosion
lockwashers and hex nuts that secure cover to when this unit is used in Class I, Group B atmospheres, the
conduit MUST have a sealing fitting within 18-inches of the
housing and carefully lift off cover. enclosure. Be sure to refer to the National Electrical Code
or the authorities having jurisdiction in your area.

C
B
E

PIPE
THREAD D DIA. I
3 HOLES
H H
A
G
F

A B C D E F G H I

20.75 in. 18.56 in. 8.312 in. 0.500 in. 16.375 in. 8.875 in. 4.500 in. 2.500 in. 0.531 in.
52.7 cm. 47.1 cm. 21.1 cm. 12 mm. 41.6 cm. 22.5 cm. 11.4 cm. 6.35 cm. 13 mm.
290A3831-01

Figure 1. Model AM302X Speaker Dimensions.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 a. Connect the audio common leads (-) to the speaker’s 2. After completion of initial system test, establish a
common terminal (marked COM). Refer to figures 2 program for periodic testing of this device. Refer to the
and 3. authority having jurisdiction for this information.
b. Connect the audio positive (+) leads to the + (SIG) 3. Provide a copy of these instructions for the Safety
terminal. Engineer, system operator(s) and maintenance person-
nel.
c. Carefully reinstall housing cover using eight 5/16-18
x 1-3/4" hex head bolts, lockwashers and hex nuts SAFETY MESSAGE TO OPERATORS
that were previously removed. Verify that all housing Even if your warning system is operating properly, it may not
and mounting bolts have been securely tightened. be completely effective. People may not hear or heed your
WARNING warning signal. You must recognize this fact and ensure that
Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if the your warning signal achieves its intended effect through
housing is not closed properly. To reduce possibility of proper test/training sequences within your specific
explosion, housing cover must be kept tight (all eight application(s).
bolts fully tightened) while circuits are energized.
E.Maintenance.
WARNING
SAFETY MESSAGE TO MAINTENANCE
Audio wires should be sized properly by your licensed
installation electrician for your service application. This cable PERSONNEL
requires a twisted shielded pair with an 18AWG mimum and Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions
should produce no more than 15% signal loss over the may result in property damage, serious injury, or death to
length of the cable run. you or others.
D.Testing/Operating. • Read and understand all instructions before performing
maintenance on this unit.
WARNING
• Do not perform maintenance on this unit when circuits are
Under certain conditions these devices are capable of
energized.
producing sounds loud enough to cause hearing damage.
Adequate hearing protection should be worn if standing • Periodic checks should be made to ensure that effectiveness
within close proximity to device while testing. Recommenda- of this device has not been reduced because speaker has
tions in the OSHA Sound Level Standard become clogged with a foreign substance or because
(29 CFR 1910) should not be exceeded. objects have been placed in front of the speaker.
• Any maintenance to this unit MUST be performed by a
1. After installation is complete, be sure to test the system trained electrician in accordance with NEC guidelines and
to verify that each speaker operates satisfactorily. If it local codes.
is found that the unit is too loud for its location, a • Never alter this unit in any manner. Safety in hazardous
lower wattage tap may be selected. Carefully remove locations may be jeopardized if additional openings or
the housing cover and move the speaker internal green alterations are made to this device.
or red lead to a lower wattage tap (see figure 3).
• The nameplates, which contain cautionary or other infor-
Reinstall the housing cover and retest.
mation of importance to maintenance personnel, should not
WARNING be obscured if exterior of device is painted.
Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if the
WARNING
housing is not closed properly. To reduce possibility of
Effectiveness of explosion-proof enclosure must be
explosion, housing cover must be kept tight (all eight bolts
maintained. Use caution to avoid damaging machined
fully tightened) while circuits are energized.
surfaces.

SPEAKER
MODEL
AM30XD1

FIELD COMMON (-) LEADS TO

COMMON TERMINAL.
COM(-)

SIG(+) FIELD POSITIVE (+) LEADS TO (+)

TERMINAL.

SPEAKER INTERNAL GREEN OR RED

LEAD TO BE CONNECTED TO (SIG)
+ RED
TERMINAL.
SPEAKER
SIGNAL SOURCE - BLK
290A3831-02 290A3831-03

Figure 2. Typical Installation Wiring. Figure 3. Internal Multi-tap Wiring Set-up.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Periodically check this device to verify that there are Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide
no foreign substances in, or in front of, the speaker technical assistance with any problems that cannot be
which will reduce its effectiveness. handled locally.
2. Testing should be periodically performed. Refer to the Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspec-
authority having jurisdiction for information. tion, or repair, must be accompanied by a Return
3. In the event a volume adjustment or other repair is Material Authorization. This R.M.A. can be obtained
required, be sure to refer to the Safety Message For from the local Distributor or Manufacturer’s Representa-
Maintenance Personnel before proceeding. tive.
At this time a brief explanation of the service requested
F. Service. or the nature of the malfunction, should be given.
WARNING Address all communications and shipments to:
Unauthorized repair/servicing of the unit may result in
degradation of performance and/or property damage, serious FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
injury, or death to you or others. If a malfunctioning unit is Electrical Products Division
encountered, do not attempt any field repair/retrofit of parts. Service Department
2645 Federal Signal Drive
University Park, IL 60466-3195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine